Micrologix 1400 руководство на русском

Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Instruction Manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive

MicroLogix 1400

Programmable

Controllers

Bulletins 1766

Instruction Set Reference

Manual

loading

Related Manuals for Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400

Summary of Contents for Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400

  • Page 1
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Bulletins 1766 Instruction Set Reference Manual…
  • Page 2
    BURN HAZARD to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures. Rockwell Automation, Allen-Bradley, TechConnect, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, PLC-5, MicroLogix, SLC 500, RSLogix, RSLogix Micro, RSLinx, and RSLogix 500 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
  • Page 3
    Programmable Firmware Revision Catalog Numbers Controller MicroLogix 1400 Series A, Revision A, FRN 3 1766-L32AWA, 1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32AWAA, 1766-L32BWAA and 1766-L32BXBA controllers To upgrade the firmware for a MicroLogix controller visit the MicroLogix web site at http://www.ab.com/micrologix.
  • Page 4
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Summary of Changes Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Embedded I/O ……..16 MicroLogix 1400 Expansion I/O ….. . . 17 MicroLogix 1400 Expansion I/O Memory Mapping.

  • Page 6
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Table of Contents Programming Instructions Instruction Set ……..91 Overview Using the Instruction Descriptions .
  • Page 7
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Table of Contents EQU — Equal NEQ — Not Equal ……. . . 191 GRT — Greater Than LES — Less Than .
  • Page 8
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Table of Contents ENC — Encode 1-of-16 to 4 ……..245 FRD — Convert from Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) .
  • Page 9
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Table of Contents Chapter 18 Input and Output Instructions IIM — Immediate Input with Mask ….. 303 IOM — Immediate Output with Mask .
  • Page 10
    Communication Channel ……445 Configuring a MicroLogix 1400 CIP Generic Message via Ethernet MSG Instruction Error Codes ……466 Special Function with MSG instruction .
  • Page 11
    LCD — LCD Instruction ……542 Appendix A MicroLogix 1400 Memory Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time 545…
  • Page 12
    Hex Mask ……..665 Glossary Index MicroLogix 1400 List of Instructions and Function Files Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 13: Preface

    If you do not, obtain the proper training before using this product. Purpose of this Manual This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1400 controller. It describes the procedures you use to program and troubleshoot your controller. This manual: •…

  • Page 14
    Read this Document Document Number Information on understanding and applying micro controllers. MicroMentor 1761-MMB Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable MicroLogix 1400 Programmable 1766-IN001 Controller, including a mounting template and door labels. Controllers Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning, mounting, wiring, and troubleshooting…
  • Page 15: Who Should Use This Manual

    I/O Configuration This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the MicroLogix 1400 controllers. Each controller comes with a certain amount of embedded I/O, which is physically located on the controller. The controller also allows for adding expansion I/O.

  • Page 16: Related Documentation

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Embedded I/O The MicroLogix 1400 provide discrete I/O and analog input that is built into the controller as listed in the following table. These I/O points are referred to as Embedded I/O. Catalog Description…

  • Page 17
    Expansion I/O Expansion I/O Modules For the MicroLogix 1400, Bulletin 1762 expansion I/O is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and, in the future, specialty modules. You can attach up to seven expansion I/O modules in any combination.
  • Page 18: I/O Configuration

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration MicroLogix 1400 Discrete I/O Configuration Expansion I/O Memory Mapping 1762-IA8 ,1762-IQ8, and 1762-IQ8OW6 Input Image For each input module, the input data file contains the current state of the field input points. Bit positions 0…7 correspond to input terminals 0…7.

  • Page 19: Micrologix 1400 Expansion I/O

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Bit Position r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w = read and write, 0 = always at a 0 or OFF state 1762-OB16 and 1762-OW16 Output Image For each output module, the output data file contains the controller-directed state of the discrete output points.

  • Page 20: Micrologix 1400 Expansion I/O Memory Mapping

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Analog I/O Configuration The following table shows the data ranges for 0…10V dc and 4…20 mA. Valid Input/Output Data Word Formats/Ranges Normal Operating Full Scale Raw/Proportional Data Scaled-for-PI Range Range 0…10V dc 10.5V dc 32,760 16,380 0.0V dc…

  • Page 21
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Scaled-for-PID Format Bit Position Channel 0 Data 0 to 16,383 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16,383 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved The bits are defined as follows: • Sx = General status bits for channels 0 and 1. This bit is set when an error (over- or under-range) exists for that channel, or there is a general module hardware error.
  • Page 22
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration 1762-IF4 Input Data File For each module, slot x, words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs. The module can be configured to use either raw/proportional data or scaled-for-PID data. The input data file for either configuration is shown below.
  • Page 23
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration 1762-OF4 Input Data File Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 Reserved SO3 SO2 SO1 SO0 1 Reserved UO0 OO0 UO1 OO1 UO2 OO2 UO3 OO3 The bits are defined as follows: •…
  • Page 24
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Scaled-for-PID Format Bit Position Channel 0 Data 0 to 16,380 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16,380 Channel 2 Data 0 to 16,380 Channel 3 Data 0 to 16,380 Words 0…3 contain the analog output data for channels 0…3, respectively.
  • Page 25
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Specialty I/O Configuration 1762-IR4 RTD/Resistance Module Input Data File For each module, slot x, words 0…3 contain the analog values of the inputs. Words 4 and 5 provide sensor/channel status feedback. The input data file for each configuration is shown below. Table: 0.A d/Bit Analog Input Data Channel 0…
  • Page 26
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration 1762-IT4 Thermocouple Module Input Data File For each module, slot x, words 0…3 contain the analog values of the inputs. The input data file is shown below. Table: 0.B d/Bit Analog Input Data Channel 0 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Analog Input Data Channel 3…
  • Page 27
    Slot number (decimal) Embedded I/O: slot 0 Expansion I/O: slots 1…7 for MicroLogix 1400 (See page 17 for an illustration.) Word delimiter. Required only if a word number is necessary as noted below. Word number Required to read/write words, or if the discrete bit number is above 15.
  • Page 28
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Addressing examples Word addressing O:1.0 Output slot 1 (expansion I/O) Word 0 I:7.3 Input slot 7 (expansion I/O) Word 3 I:3.1 Input slot 3 (expansion I/O) Word 1 (1) The optional Data File Number is not shown in these examples. (2) A word delimiter and number are not shown.
  • Page 29: I/O Addressing

    If you force an output controlled by an executing PTOX or PWMX function, an instruction error is generated. Input Filtering The MicroLogix 1400 controllers allow users to configure groups of DC inputs for high-speed or normal operation. Users can configure each input group’s response time. A configurable filter determines how long the input signal must be “on”…

  • Page 30
    User Manual. Analog Inputs The MicroLogix 1400 -L32BWAA, -L32AWAA, and -L32BXBA support 4-channel, 12-bit resolution analog input with four 12-bit resolution analog input channels. These channels are single-ended (unipolar) circuits and accept 0…10V DC.
  • Page 31: I/O Forcing

    I/O Configuration Analog Input Filter and Update times The MicroLogix 1400 analog input filter is programmable. The slower the filter setting, the more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise. The more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise, the slower the inputs will be to update.

  • Page 32: Analog Inputs

    1200 4095 Analog Outputs The MicroLogix 1400 -L32BWAA, -L32AWAA, and -L32BXBA support 2-channel, 12-bit resolution analog output. These channels have 0…10V DC output range. Output words 4 and 5 contain the value of analog outputs (Word 4 : analog output channel 0, Word 5 : analog output channel 1).

  • Page 33
    ———— — 3000 4095 The MicroLogix 1400 controller provides the ability to individually configure inputs to be latching inputs (sometimes referred to as pulse catching inputs). A latching input is an input that captures a very fast pulse and holds it for a single controller scan. The pulse width that can be captured is dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input.
  • Page 34: Analog Outputs

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Rising Edge Behavior — Example 1 Scan Number (X) Scan Number (X+1) Scan Number (X+2) Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status…

  • Page 35: Latching Inputs

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration • The detection is on the “falling edge” of the external input. • The input image is normally “on” (1), and changes to “off” (0) for one scan. Falling Edge Behavior — Example 1 Scan Number (X) Scan Number (X+1) Scan Number (X+2)

  • Page 36
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is IMPORTANT configured for latching behavior. When configured for falling edge behavior, the input file value is normally “on” (“off” for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected).
  • Page 37: Configure Expansion

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Configure Expansion Expansion I/O must be configured for use with the controller. Configuring expansion I/O can be done either manually, or automatically. Using I/O Using RSLogix 500/ RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro: RSLogix Micro 1. Open the Controller folder. 2.

  • Page 38
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive I/O Configuration Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 39: Controller Memory And File Types

    Chapter Controller Memory and File Types This chapter describes controller memory and the types of files used by the MicroLogix 1400 controller. The chapter is organized as follows: • Controller Memory on page 40 • Data Files on page 45 •…

  • Page 40: Types Data Files

    Controller Memory and File Types Controller Memory File Structure MicroLogix 1400 controller user memory comprises Data Files, Function Files, and Program Files. The file types shown for data files 3…8 are the default file types for those file numbers and cannot be changed. Data files 9…255 can be added to your program to operate as bit, timer, counter, or other files shown below.

  • Page 41
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Controller User Memory File Types Data Files Function Files Program Files Specialty Files Bit File Selectable Timed 3…255 Program Files 3…255 Recipe File 0 Interrupt Timer File Event Input Interrupt Recipe File 1 Counter File Real Time Clock 2…255 Recipe Files 2…255…
  • Page 42
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types User Memory User memory is the amount of controller storage available to store data such as ladder logic, data table files, and I/O configuration. User data files consist of the system status file, I/O image files, and all other user-creatable data files (bit, timer, counter, control, integer, string, long word, MSG, and PID).
  • Page 43
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types MicroLogix 1400 User Memory The MicroLogix 1400 controller supports 20K of memory. Memory can be used for program files and data files. The maximum data memory usage is 10K words as shown.
  • Page 44
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Viewing Controller Memory Usage 1. Highlight and open Controller Properties. 2. The amount of Memory Used and Memory Left will appear in the Controller Properties window once the program has been verified. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 45
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Data Files Data files store numeric information, including I/O, status, and other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines. The data file types are: File Name File File Words per File Description Identifier Element…
  • Page 46
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types File Name File File Words per File Description Identifier Element Number Extended 9…255 The extended Routing Information File is associated with the MSG Routing instruction. See Communications Instructions on page 393 for information Information File on the MSG instruction.
  • Page 47
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Protecting Data Files Data File Download Protection During Download Once a user program is in the controller, there may be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying user-configured variables in one or more data files in the controller.
  • Page 48
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Access the Download Data File Protect feature using RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro programming software. For each data file you want protected, check the Memory Module/ Download item within the protection box in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration.
  • Page 49: Protecting Data Files During Download

    Using Static File Protection with Data File Download Protection Static File Protection and Data File Download Protection can be used in combination with MicroLogix 1400 Controller Series A and higher. Setting Static File Protection Static File Protection can be applied to the following data file types: •…

  • Page 50
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Access the Static File Protect feature using RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro programming software. For each data file you want protected, select the Static protection in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration.
  • Page 51: Static File Protection

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types If a password is lost or forgotten, there is no way to bypass the password to recover the program. The only option is to clear the controller’s memory. If the Memory Module User Program has the “Load Always” functionality enabled, and the controller User Program has a password specified, the controller compares the passwords before transferring the User Program from the Memory Module to the controller.

  • Page 52: Password Protection

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Allow Future Access The controller supports a feature which allows you to select if future access to the User Program should be allowed or disallowed after it has Setting (OEM Lock) been transferred to the controller.

  • Page 53: Clearing The Controller Memory

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Using RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro V8.10 and higher, you can disable individual data files from being viewed via any web browser by selecting the data file’s properties page and checking the Web View Disable check box as shown below.

  • Page 54: Allow Future Access Setting (Oem Lock)

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types LCD Edit Disable This allows selective protection of individual Data Files on the LCD. Using RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro V8.10 and higher, select the data file’s properties page and check the LCD Edit Disable check box as shown below.

  • Page 55: Lcd Edit Disable

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 56
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Controller Memory and File Types Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 57
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Function Files This chapter describes controller function files. The chapter is organized as follows: • Overview on page 56 • Real-Time Clock Function File on page 57 • Memory Module Information Function File on page 60 •…
  • Page 58: Function Files

    Overview Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1400 controller (Program Files and Data Files are the others). Function Files provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources. Controller resources are resident (permanent) features such as the Real-Time Clock and High-Speed Counter.

  • Page 59: Real-Time Clock Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Real-Time Clock The real-time clock provides year, month, day of month, day of week, hour, minute, and second information to the Real-Time Clock (RTC) Function File Function File in the controller. The Real-Time Clock parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below.

  • Page 60
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files The real-time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data. Use the Disable Clock button in your programming device to disable the real-time clock before storing a module. This decreases the drain on the battery during storage.
  • Page 61: Rta — Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction

    When Rung Is: Real Time Clock Adjust Controller True False MicroLogix 1400 999.8510 µs 0.4090 µs The RTA instruction is used to synchronize the controllers Real-Time Clock (RTC) with an external source. The RTA instruction will adjust the RTC to the nearest minute. The RTA instruction adjusts the RTC based on the value of the RTC Seconds as described below.

  • Page 62: Memory Module Information Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Memory Module The controller has a Memory Module Information (MMI) File which is updated with data from the attached memory module. At power-up or on Information Function detection of a memory module being inserted, the catalog number, series, File revision, and type are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program.

  • Page 63
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files MP — Module Present The MP (Module Present) bit can be used in the user program to determine when a memory module is present on the controller. This bit is updated once per scan, provided the memory module is first recognized by the controller.
  • Page 64: Base Hardware Information Function File

    See Power-Up Mode Behavior on page 557 for more information. Base Hardware The base hardware information (BHI) file is a read-only file that contains a description of the MicroLogix 1400 Controller. Information Function File Base Hardware Information Function File (BHI)

  • Page 65: Communications Status File

    43…70 when using DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex, DH-485, or ASCII: End of List Category Identifier Code MicroLogix 1400 (always 0) • MicroLogix 1400 43…70 Reserved words 43…70 when using Modbus RTU Slave, Master or DF1 Half-Duplex Master: • MicroLogix 1400 43…69…

  • Page 66
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files General Status Block of Communications Status File General Channel Status Block Word Description Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code Length Format Code Communications Configuration Error Code ICP – Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set (1) when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller.
  • Page 67
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Diagnostic Counter Block of Communications Status File With RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro version 8.10.00 and later, formatted displays of the diagnostic counters for each configured channel are available under Channel Status. These displays include a Clear button that allows you to reset the diagnostic counters while monitoring them online with the programming software.
  • Page 68
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DH-485 Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 0) Total Message Packets Received Total Message Packets Sent 0…7 Message Packet Retries 8…15 Retry Limit Exceeded (Non-Delivery) 0…7 NAK –…
  • Page 69
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DF1 Full-Duplex Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 1) Reserved Reserved 4…15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets ENQuiry Packets Sent NAK Packets Received ENQuiry Packets Received…
  • Page 70
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DF1 Half-Duplex Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 2) Reserved Reserved 4…15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets Message Packets Retried NAK Packets Received…
  • Page 71
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DF1 Half-Duplex Master Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 3) Reserved Reserved 4…15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets Message Packets Retried Reserved…
  • Page 72
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DF1 Radio Modem Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 1) Reserved Reserved 4…15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets 13…15 — Reserved…
  • Page 73
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block (Data Link Layer) Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 4) Reserved Reserved 4…15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received for This Slave Total Message Packets Received Link Layer Error Count Link Layer Error Code…
  • Page 74
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block (Presentation Layer) Word Description Function Code 1 Message Counter Function Code 2 Message Counter Function Code 3 Message Counter Function Code 4 Message Counter Function Code 5 Message Counter Function Code 6 Message Counter Function Code 8 Message Counter Function Code 15 Message Counter…
  • Page 75
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block (Data Link Layer) Word Description Link Layer Error Count Link Layer Error Code 15…22 — Reserved Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block (Presentation Layer) Word Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 6) Length (always 32) Format Code (always 0) ERR 1: Illegal Function…
  • Page 76
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 77
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files ASCII Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier code (always 2) Length (always 30) Format Code (always 5) Reserved Reserved 4…15 Reserved Software Handshaking Status 1…15 Reserved Echo Character Count Received Character Count 13…18 — Reserved Bad Character Count…
  • Page 78
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DNP3 Slave Diagnostic Counters Block (Data Link Layer) Access Word Bit Description Non-Exe DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier code Length: 30 (15 words to follow including format code) Counters Format Code: 11 — DNP3 Slave 15…4 RO Reserved Modem Control Line States — Always zero…
  • Page 79
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files DNP3 Slave Diagnostic Counters Block (Presentation Layer) Access Word Description Non-Exe PL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (6)) Length: 32 (16 words to follow including format code) Category Block Format Code — 2 Presentation Layer Error Code Presentation Layer Error Count Function Code that caused the last error Last Transmitted IIN in the response…
  • Page 80
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Active Node Table Block of Communications Status File Active Node Table Block Word Description Active Node Table Category Identifier Code (always 3) Length: • always 4 for DH-485 • always 18 for DF1 Half-Duplex Master •…
  • Page 81
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 82: Ethernet Communications Status File

    Word Description Applies to Controller on Page 0…119 General Channel Status Block MicroLogix 1400 120…17 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1400 End of List Category Identifier Code (always MicroLogix 1400 The following tables show the details of each block in the Ethernet Communications Status File.

  • Page 83
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files General Channel Status Block Word Description ICP – Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set (1) when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller. Once the request has been satisfied, the bit is cleared (0). MRP –…
  • Page 84
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files General Channel Status Block Word Description Ethernet Port Link Status This bit is set (1) when the Ethernet link is active. Ethernet Port Connection Speed This bit is valid when the Auto Negotiation function is enabled. This bit indicates the speed of the link layer driver operating at Ethernet port: •…
  • Page 85
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files General Channel Status Block Word Description Advertise 100 MB Full Duplex Flag This bit indicates advertisement status if Auto negotiate enabled: • 0: 100 MB Full Duplex was not advertised during auto negotiation • 1: 100 MB Full Duplex was advertised during auto negotiation Advertise 100 MB Half Duplex Flag This bit indicates advertisement status if Auto negotiate enabled: •…
  • Page 86
    Message Reply Timeout The amount of time (in ms) that the MicroLogix 1400 processor waits for a reply to a command that it has initiated via a MSG instruction. The MSG Reply Timeout has a range of 250 ms…65,500 ms.
  • Page 87
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block Word Description Low word RMON Tx Packets High word (RMON_T_PACKETS) Low word Frames Transmitted with Excessive Collisions High word (IEEE_T_EXCOL) Low word Frames Received with CRC Error High word (IEEE_R_CRC) Low word Frames Received with Alignment Error High word…
  • Page 88
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block (continued) Word Description Low word Total Commands Sent High word Low word Total Commands Received High word Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block (continued) Word Description Low word Total Replies Sent High word Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 89
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block (continued) Word Description Low word Total Replies Received High word Low word Total Replies Sent with Error High word Low word Total Replies Received with Error High word Low word Total Replies Timed Out High word Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 90
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Ethernet Diagnostic Counters Block (continued) Word Description Low word Total Message Connections High word Low word Incoming Message Connections High word Low word Outgoing Message Connections High word Low word Maximum Connections Allowed High word The last Port tab will show the current states of Ethernet communications port according to word 5 of Ethernet Communications Status File.
  • Page 91: Input/Output Status File

    Word Description Embedded Module Error Code – Always zero 1…4 Expansion Module Error Code – The word number corresponds to the module’s slot number. Refer to the I/O module’s documentation for specific information. (MicroLogix 1400) Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 92: Publication 1766-Rm001A-En-P — October

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Function Files Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 93: Instruction Set

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Programming Instructions Overview Instruction Set The following table shows the MicroLogix 1400 programming instructions listed within their functional group. Functional Group Description Page High-Speed Counter HSL, RAC – The high-speed counter instructions (along with the HSC function file) allow you to monitor and control the high-speed counter.

  • Page 94: Using The Instruction Descriptions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Programming Instructions Overview Using the Instruction Throughout this manual, each instruction (or group of similar instructions) has a table similar to the one shown below. This table provides Descriptions information for all sub-elements (or components) of an instruction or group of instructions.

  • Page 95
    By supporting these three addressing methods, the MicroLogix 1400 allows incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated. Each of the addressing modes are described below.
  • Page 96
    The MicroLogix 1400 supports indirection (indirect addressing) for Files, Words and Bits. To define which components of an address are to be indirected, a closed bracket “[ ]” is used. The following examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing.
  • Page 97
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Programming Instructions Overview • Address: N[N50:100]:10 • Description: In this example, the source of the COP instruction is indirected by N50:100. The data in N50:100 defines the data file number to be used in the instruction. In this example, the copy instruction source A is defined by N[N50:100]:10.
  • Page 98
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing of Bit B3:0 B3:0 0002 [B25:0] 0003 • Address: B3/[B25:0] • Description: In this example, the element to be used for the indirection is B25:0. The data in B25:0 defines the bit within file B3. If the value of location B25:0 = 1017, the XIC instruction is processed using B3/1017.
  • Page 99
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Programming Instructions Overview Example — Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing In this section, an indexed addressing example is shown first. Then an equivalent indirect addressing example is shown. Indexed addressing is supported by SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers. The MicroLogix 1100, 1200, 1400, and 1500 do not support indexed addressing.
  • Page 100
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing Example An equivalent example using indirect addressing is shown below. In place of using the index register, S:24, the user can designate any other valid word address as the indirect address. Multiple indirect addresses can be used within an instruction.
  • Page 101: High-Speed Counter Overview

    Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High-Speed Counter All MicroLogix 1400, except the 1766-L32AWA and 1766_L32AWAA, have six 100kHz high-speed counters. There are three main high-speed Overview counters (counter 0, 1, 2) and three sub high speed counters (counter 3, 4, 5).

  • Page 102: High-Speed Counter (Hsc) Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High-Speed Counter Within the RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro Function File Folder, you see a HSC Function File. This file provides access to HSC configuration data, (HSC) Function File and also allows the control program access to all information pertaining to the High-Speed Counter.

  • Page 103
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The HSC is extremely versatile; the user can select or configure the master HSC for any one of ten (10) modes and the sub HSC for any one of five (5) modes of operation.
  • Page 104: High-Speed Counter Function File Sub-Elements Summary

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High-Speed Counter The HSC is comprised of 36 sub-elements. These sub-elements are either bit, word, or long word structures that are used to provide control over Function File the HSC function, or provide HSC status information for use within the Sub-Elements Summary control program.

  • Page 105: Hsc Function File Sub-Elements

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Function File All examples illustrate HSC0. Sub-Elements Program File Number (PFN) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access PFN — Program HSC:0.PFN word (INT) 0…9 control read only File Number…

  • Page 106
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Function Enabled (FE) Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HSC Modes FE — Function HSC:0/FE bit 0…9 control read/write Enabled (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The FE (Function Enabled) is a status/control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt is enabled, and that interrupts generated by the HSC are processed based on their priority.
  • Page 107
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Counting Enabled (CE) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CE — Counting HSC:0/CE bit 0…9 control read/write Enabled (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The CE (Counting Enabled) control bit is used to enable or disable the High-Speed Counter.
  • Page 108
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch User Interrupt Enable (UIE) Description Address Data Type User Program Format Access Modes UIE — User Interrupt Enable HSC:0/UIE bit 0…9 control read/write (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The UIE (User Interrupt Enable) bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine processing.
  • Page 109
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch • Underflow condition — count down through the underflow value The HSC UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing. The HSC sub-system will clear (0) the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine.
  • Page 110
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Low Preset Mask (LPM) Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HSC Modes LPM — Low HSC:0/LPM bit 2…9 control read/write Preset Mask (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The LPM (Low Preset Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a low preset interrupt from occurring.
  • Page 111
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Low Preset Reached (LPR) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPR — Low HSC:0/LPR bit 2…9 status read only Preset Reached (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The LPR (Low Preset Reached) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system whenever the accumulated value (HSC:0.ACC) is less than or equal to the low preset variable (HSC:0.LOP).
  • Page 112
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Mask (HPM) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPM — High HSC:0/HPM bit 0…9 control read/write Preset Mask (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The HPM (High Preset Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a high preset interrupt from occurring.
  • Page 113
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Reached (HPR) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPR — High HSC:0/HPR bit 2…9 status read only Preset Reached (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The HPR (High Preset Reached) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system whenever the accumulated value (HSC:0.ACC) is greater than or equal to the high preset variable (HSC:0.HIP).
  • Page 114
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The UFM (Underflow Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a underflow interrupt from occurring. If this bit is clear (0), and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC, the HSC user interrupt is not executed.
  • Page 115
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub-system. It is up to the control program to utilize, track if necessary, and clear (0) the overflow condition.
  • Page 116
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Overflow Mask (OFM) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OFM — Overflow HSC:0/OFM bit 0…9 control read/write Mask (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The OFM (Overflow Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) an overflow interrupt from occurring.
  • Page 117
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Count Direction (DIR) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access DIR — Count HSC:0/DIR bit 0…9 status read only Direction (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The DIR (Count Direction) status flag is controlled by the HSC sub-system.
  • Page 118
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Count Up (CU) Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CU — Count Up HSC:0/CU bit 0…9 status read only (1) For Mode descriptions, see HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. The CU (Count Up) bit is used with all of the HSCs (modes 0…9).
  • Page 119
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number Up Counter — The accumulator is immediately cleared (0) when it reaches the high preset. A low preset cannot be defined in this mode. Up Counter with external reset and hold — The accumulator is immediately cleared (0) when it reaches the high preset.
  • Page 120
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Function Operating Modes & Input Assignments Modes of Operation Input 0 (HSC:0) Input 1 (HSC:0) Input 2 (HSC:0) Input 3 (HSC:0) Mode Value in User Program Input 4 (HSC:1) Input 5 (HSC:1) Input 6 (HSC:1) Input 7 (HSC:1)
  • Page 121
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 0 — Up Counter HSC Mode 0 Examples Input Terminals I1:0.0/0 (HSC0) I1:0.0/1 (HSC0) I1:0.0/2 (HSC0) I1:0.0/3 (HSC0) CE Bit Comments Function Count Not Used Not Used Not Used ⇑…
  • Page 122
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 2 — Counter with External Direction HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Terminals I1:0.0/0 (HSC0) I1:0.0/1 (HSC0) I1:0.0/2 (HSC0) I1:0.0/3 (HSC0) CE Bit Comments Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used ⇑…
  • Page 123
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 4 — Two Input Counter (up and down) HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals I1:0.0/0 (HSC0) I1:0.0/1 (HSC0) I1:0.0/2 (HSC0) I1:0.0/3 (HSC0) CE Bit Comments Function Count Up Count Down Not Used…
  • Page 124
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using the Quadrature Encoder The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating, such as a lathe. The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder. The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0, 1, and 2.
  • Page 125
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used. HSC Mode 7 — Quadrature Counter (phased inputs A and B) With External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 7 Examples Input…
  • Page 126
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 8 Examples I1:0.0/1(HSC0) I1:0.0/1(HSC0) Value of CE Bit Accumulator and Counter Action TRUE Count Up Acc. Value TRUE Count Down Acc. Value OFF or ON OFF or ON Hold Acc.
  • Page 127
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Accumulator (ACC) Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ACC — Accumulator HSC:0.ACC long word (32-bit INT) control read/write The ACC (Accumulator) contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub-system.
  • Page 128
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch • Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction. See HSL — High-Speed Counter Load on page 130. The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow (HSC:0.UNF) parameter, or an HSC error is generated.
  • Page 129
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the overflow value (counts are not lost in this transition). The user can specify any value for the underflow position, provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.
  • Page 130
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Address 16-Bit Signed Integer Data Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 O0:0.0 The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub-system.
  • Page 131
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Output (HPO) Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HPO — High Preset Output HSC:0.HPO word (16-bit binary) control read/write The HPO (High Preset Output) defines the state (1 = ON or 0 = OFF) of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached.
  • Page 132: Hsl — High-Speed Counter Load

    Low Preset N7:1 Output High Source N7:2 True False Output Low Source N7:3 MicroLogix 1400 word 18.8260 µs 0.2910 µs long word 18.6510 µs 0.4690 µs The HSL (High-Speed Load) instruction allows the high and low presets, and high and low output source to be applied to a high-speed counter.

  • Page 133: Rac — Reset Accumulated Value

    Source Controller Execution Time When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 8.3310 µs 0.2030 µs The RAC instruction resets the high-speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator. The RAC instruction uses the following parameters: •…

  • Page 134: Programmable Limit Switch (Pls) File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Programmable Limit The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High-Speed Counter to operate as a PLS (programmable limit switch) or Switch (PLS) File rotary cam switch. When PLS operation is enabled, the HSC (High-Speed Counter) uses a PLS data file for limit/cam positions.

  • Page 135
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch When the HSC counts to that new preset, the new output data is written through the HSC mask. This process continues until the last element within the PLS file is loaded. At that point the active element within the PLS file is reset to zero.
  • Page 136
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Table 1: Format Explanation PLSf:e.s PLS Programmable Limit Switch file File number The valid file number range is from 9…255. Element delimiter Element number The valid element number range is from 0…255. Sub-Element delimiter Sub-Element number The valid sub-element number range is from 0…5…
  • Page 137
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 138
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 3. Enter a file number (9…255) and select Programmable Limit Switch as the type. A Name and/or Description may be entered as well, but is not required. 4. Elements refers to the number of PLS steps. For this example enter a value of 4.
  • Page 139
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch PLS Data File Definitions: Data Description Data Format High Preset 32-bit signed integer Low Preset Output High Data 16-bit binary Output Low Data (bit 15—> 0000 0000 0000 0000 <—bit 0) Once the values above have been entered for HIP and OHD, the PLS is configured.
  • Page 140
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 141: Pto — Pulse Train Output

    The PTO function can only be used with the controller’s embedded I/O. It PTO Number IMPORTANT cannot be used with expansion I/O modules. The PTO instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA IMPORTANT units. Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high-speed operations.

  • Page 142
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs • Accelerate/decelerate intervals • Run interval The PTO instruction, along with the HSC and PWM functions, are different than most other controller instructions. Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor.
  • Page 143
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs While the PTO instruction is being executed, status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate. Because the PTO instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system, status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running.
  • Page 144
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs structure of the control program determines when the DN bit goes off. So, to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output, you can monitor the Done (DN), Idle (ID), or Normal Operation (NO) status bits. Stage Rung State Sub-Elements:…
  • Page 145: Pulse Train Outputs (Ptox) Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs The Done (DN) bit becomes true (1) when the PTO completes and remains set until the PTO rung logic is false. The false rung logic re-activates the PTO instruction. To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output, monitor the done (DN) bit.

  • Page 146: Pulse Train Output Function File Sub-Elements Summary

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs If the controller mode is run, the data within sub-element fields may be changing. Pulse Train Output The variables within each PTOX sub-element, along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables, are listed Function File individually below.

  • Page 147
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Function File (PTOX:0) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information IS — Idle Status PTOX:0/IS 0 or 1 status read only ED — Error Detected Status PTOX:0/ED 0 or 1 status…
  • Page 148
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running stops all output pulses and causes a PTO error. PTOX Done (DN) Sub-Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DN — Done PTOX:0/DN bit 0 or 1…
  • Page 149
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PTOX Run Status (RS) Sub-Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RS — Run Status PTOX:0/RS 0 or 1 status read only The PTOX RS (Run Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program.
  • Page 150
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs • Set (1) — Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S-Curve profile. • Cleared (0) — Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile. PTOX Idle Status (IS) Sub-Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program…
  • Page 151
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PTOX Normal Operation Status (NS) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS — Normal Operation Status PTOX:0/ 0 or 1 status read only The PTOX NS (Normal Operation Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system.
  • Page 152
    In the MicroLogix 1400 controller, the data less than zero or greater than 100,000 generates a PTOX error. PTOX Operating Frequency Status (OFS)
  • Page 153
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PTOX Total Output Pulses To Be Generated (TOP) Sub-Element Address Data Range Type User Description Format Program Access TOP — Total Output PTOX:0.TO long word 0…2,147,483,647 control read/write Pulses To Be Generated (32-bit INT) The PTOX TOP (Total Output Pulses) defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile (accel/run/decel inclusive).
  • Page 154
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs The choice of selecting a common profile or separate profiles must be made at the time of programming. This cannot be changed once the program is downloaded into the controller. The selection of the ramp type must be made prior to going to run.
  • Page 155
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs Accel Decel 12,000 Accel Decel 6,000 6,000 In this example, the maximum value that could be used for accelerate/ decelerate is 6000, because if both accelerate and decelerate are 6000, the total number of pulses = 12,000. The run component would be zero. This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0…6000.
  • Page 156
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs The PTOX CS (Controlled Stop) bit is used to stop an executing PTO instruction, in the run portion of the profile, by immediately starting the decel phase. Once set, the decel phase completes without an error or fault condition.
  • Page 157
    Jog phases. This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven, the mechanics of the application, or the device/components being moved. In the MicroLogix 1400 controller, the data less than zero or greater than 100,000 generates a PTOX error.
  • Page 158
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs • Set (1) — Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse • Cleared (0) — Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state The output (jog) pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set. The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared (0 = off).
  • Page 159
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs • Set (1) — Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses • Cleared (0) — Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses. PTOX Error Code (ER) Sub-Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program…
  • Page 160: Pwm — Pulse Width Modulation

    The PWM function can only be used with the controller’s embedded I/O. It PWM Number IMPORTANT cannot be used with expansion I/O modules. The PWM instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or IMPORTANT BXBA unit. Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high-speed operations.

  • Page 161: Pwm Function

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PWM Function The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form. The PWM profile has two primary components: • Frequency to be generated • Duty Cycle interval The PWM instruction, along with the HSC and PTO functions, are different than all other controller instructions.

  • Page 162: Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs Pulse Width Modulated The variables within each PWMX element, along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables, are listed Function File Elements individually below. Summary Pulse Width Modulated Function File (PWMX:0) Element Description Address Data Format Range…

  • Page 163
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PWMX Output (OUT) Element Address Data Range Type User Program Access Description Format OUT — PWM Output PWMX:0.OU word (INT) 2…4 status read only The PWMX OUT (Output) variable defines the physical output that the PWM instruction controls.
  • Page 164
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs • Set (1) — Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile. • Cleared (0) — Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile. PWMX Accelerating Status (AS) Element Description Address…
  • Page 165
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PWMX Idle Status (IS) Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access IS — PWM Idle Status PWMX:0/IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWMX IS (Idle Status) is controlled by the PWM sub-system and represents no PWM activity.
  • Page 166
    The PWMX OF (Output Frequency) variable defines the frequency of the PWM function. This frequency can be changed at any time. In the MicroLogix 1400 controller, the data less than zero or greater than 40,000 generates a PWM error. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 167
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PWMX Operating Frequency Status (OFS) Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OFS — PWM Operating Frequency Status PWMX:0.OFS long word 0…40,000 status read only (32-bit INT) The PWMX OFS (Output Frequency Status) is generated by the PWM sub-system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the PWM sub-system.
  • Page 168
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using High-Speed Outputs PWMX Accel/Decel Delay (ADD) Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ADD — Accel/Decel Delay PWMX:0.ADD word (INT) 0…32,767 control read/write PWMX ADD (Accel/Decel Delay) defines the amount of time in 10 millisecond interval to ramp from zero to 20kHz frequency.
  • Page 169: Xic — Examine If Closed Xio — Examine If Open

    XIO — Examine if Open Instruction Type: input B3:0 Execution Time for the XIC Instruction Controller When Instruction Is: B3:0 True False MicroLogix 1400 0.2646 µs 0.2512 µs Execution Time for the XIO Instruction Controller When Instruction Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.2513 µs…

  • Page 170
    • • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, LCD, and DLS files.
  • Page 171: Ote — Output Energize

    Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.2685 µs 0.2629 µs Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false. An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light (addressed as O0:0/4).

  • Page 172: Otl — Output Latch Otu — Output Unlatch

    • • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, LCD, CS, IOS, and DLS files.

  • Page 173: Ons — One Shot

    • • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, LCD, and DLS files.

  • Page 174: Osr — One Shot Rising Osf — One Shot Falling

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions The ONS instruction for the MicroLogix 1400 provides the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers. The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time.

  • Page 175
    B3:0/0 Output Bit B3:0/1 The OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1400 does not provide the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers. For the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers, use the ONS instruction.
  • Page 176
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit true-to-false (one scan) bit is reset bit is set false-to-false bit is reset bit is reset false-to-true and true-to-true bit is set bit is reset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:…
  • Page 177: Timer Instructions Overview

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Timer and Counter Instructions Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events. The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter: Instruction Used To: Page TON — Timer, On-Delay…

  • Page 178
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions Timer Base Settings Time Base Timing Range 0.001 seconds 0…32.767 seconds 0.01 seconds 0…327.67 seconds 1.00 seconds 0…32,767 seconds Each timer address is made of a 3-word element. Word 0 is the control and status word, word 1 stores the preset value, and word 2 stores the accumulated value.
  • Page 179
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 92. Address Function Files Address Level Data Files Mode Parameter Preset…
  • Page 180
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete. Timer Accuracy Time Base Accuracy 0.001 seconds -0.001…0.00 0.01 seconds -0.01…0.00…
  • Page 181: Ton — Timer, On-Delay

    0< Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 2.0338 µs (DN=0) 0.8608 µs (DN=0) 1.2608 µs (DN=1) Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an output. The TON instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become true.

  • Page 182: Tof — Timer, Off-Delay

    Accum 0< Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.5203 µs 1.0962 µs (DN=0) 0.5322 µs (DN=1) Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output. The TOF instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become false.

  • Page 183: Rto — Retentive Timer, On-Delay

    0< Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 1.1710 µs (DN=0) 0.5480 µs 0.6100 µs (DN=1) Use the RTO instruction to delay turning “on” an output. The RTO begins to count time base intervals when the rung conditions become true. As long as the rung conditions remain true, the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached.

  • Page 184: How Counters Work

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions How Counters Work The figure below demonstrates how a counter works. The count value must remain in the range of -32,768…+32,767. If the count value goes above +32,767, the counter status overflow bit (OV) is set (1). If the count goes below -32,768, the counter status underflow bit (UN) is set (1).

  • Page 185
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter. The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset. Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table: CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types…
  • Page 186
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions CTD Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits, Counter Word 0 (Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example.) Is Set When: And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs: bit 11 — C5:0/UN UN — underflow…
  • Page 187: Ctu — Count Up Ctd — Count Down

    0< Accum 0< Controller CTU — When Rung Is: CTD — When Rung Is: True False True False Count Down MicroLogix 1400 0.4849 µs 0.3812 µs 0.4350 µs 0.3803 µs Counter C5:0 Preset 0< Accum 0< The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false-to-true rung transition.

  • Page 188: Res — Reset

    Execution Time for the RES Instructions Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.6320 µs 0.4305 µs The RES instruction resets timers, counters, and control elements. When the RES instruction is executed, it resets the data defined by the RES instruction.

  • Page 189
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 92. Address Data Files Function Files Address Level Mode Parameter Structure…
  • Page 190
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Timer and Counter Instructions Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 191
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Compare Instructions Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data. Instruction Used To: Page EQU — Equal Test whether two values are equal (=) NEQ — Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a second value (≠) LES — Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second…
  • Page 192: Using The Compare Instructions

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. (3) Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator (HSC.ACC) for Source A in GRT, LES, GEQ and LEQ instructions.

  • Page 193: Equ — Equal Neq — Not Equal

    Source A N7:0 Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is: 0< Source B N7:1 True False 0< MicroLogix 1400 EQU word 1.0814 µs 1.0854 µs long word 1.0674 µs 1.0828 µs word 1.5056 µs 0.1880 µs Not Equal long word 1.3892 µs…

  • Page 194: Geq — Greater Than Or Equal To Leq — Less Than Or Equal To

    LEQ — Less Than or Equal Execution Time for the GEQ and LEQ Instructions Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is: True False Grtr Than or Eql (A>=B) MicroLogix 1400 GEQ word 1.0710 µs 0.2228 µs Source A N7:0 0< long word 1.0601 µs 0.2242 µs…

  • Page 195: Meq — Mask Compare For Equal

    N7:0 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False Mask N7:1 0000h< MicroLogix 1400 word 6.2730 µs 0.1934 µs Compare N7:2 0< long word 7.1602 µs 0.1780 µs The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value (source) is equal to a second value (compare) through a mask.

  • Page 196: Lim — Limit Test

    • • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS files.

  • Page 197
    • • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS files.
  • Page 198
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Compare Instructions Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 199: Math Instructions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Math Instructions General Information Before using math instructions, become familiar with the following topics at the beginning of this chapter: • Using the Math Instructions • Updates to Math Status Bits • Using the Floating Point (F) Data File This chapter also explains how advanced math instructions and application specific instructions function in your logic program.

  • Page 200: Using The Math Instructions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Advanced Math Instructions Instruction Used To: Page Take the sine of a number and store the result in the destination. 211 Take the cosine of a number and store the result in the destination. Take the tangent of a number and store the result in the destination.

  • Page 201
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 202: Updates To Math Status Bits

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Updates to Math Status After a math instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated. The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor Bits status file (S2). Math Status Bits With this Bit: The Controller:…

  • Page 203: Using The Floating Point (F) Data File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Using the Floating Point File Description (F) Data File Floating point files contain IEEE-754 floating point data elements. One floating point element is shown below. You can have up to 256 of these elements in each floating point file. Floating Point Data File Structure Floating Point Element 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00…

  • Page 204
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Definitions Overflow — occurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is greater than 254. Underflow — occurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is less than one. Floating Point Exception Values Zero — represented by an exponent and a mantissa of zero.
  • Page 205
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Addressing Floating Point Files The addressing format for floating point data files is shown below. Table 2: Format Explanation Ff:e Floating Point file File number The valid file number range is from 8 (default) to 255. Element delimiter Element number The valid element number range is from 0…255.
  • Page 206
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Considerations When Using Floating Point Data When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value: • If either Source is NAN, then the result is NAN. • All overflows result in infinity with the correct sign. •…
  • Page 207: Add — Add Sub — Subtract

    Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions Source A N7:0 Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False Source B N7:1 0< MicroLogix 1400 ADD word 1.8868 µs 0.3540 µs Dest N7:2 0< long word 1.7807 µs 0.3546 µs word 1.8426 µs 0.3767 µs long word 1.7651 µs…

  • Page 208: Neg — Negate

    Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 1.3570 µs 0.3548 µs long word 1.3660 µs 0.3413 µs Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result in the Destination.

  • Page 209
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Source and Destination do not have to be the same data type. However, if the signed result does not fit in Destination, the following will occur. ABS Result Does Not Fit in Destination When Both Operands Are Integers When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data •…
  • Page 210: Scl — Scale

    When Rung Is: 0< Offset N7:2 True False 0< MicroLogix 1400 10.9080 µs 0.3608 µs Dest N7:3 0< The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the Rate (slope) value. The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination.

  • Page 211: Scp — Scale With Parameters

    Execution Time for the SCP Instruction Scale w/Parameters Controller Data Size When Rung Is: Input N7:0 0< True False Input Min. N7:1 0< MicroLogix 1400 word 83.2977 µs 0.3878 µs Input Max. N7:2 long word 87.0493 µs 0.2910 µs 0< Scaled Min. N7:3 0<…

  • Page 212
    • • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS files.
  • Page 213: Sqr — Square Root

    Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 54.8140 µs 0.3561 µs long word 45.1450 µs 0.3732 µs The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination.

  • Page 214
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 215
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Instruction Operation When the rung is true, this instruction shall compute the sine of the Source (in radians) and place the result in Destination. If the Destination is floating point, the result shall always be rounded using the round to even rule.
  • Page 216: Cos — Cosine

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.

  • Page 217
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Instruction Operation When the rung is true, this instruction shall compute cosine of the Source (in radians) and place the result in Destination. If the Destination is floating point, the result shall always be rounded using the round to even rule.
  • Page 218: Tan — Tangent

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.

  • Page 219
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions Instruction Operation When the rung is true, this instruction shall compute tangent of the Source (in radians) and place the result in Destination. If the Destination is floating point, the result shall always be rounded using the round to even rule.
  • Page 220: Asn — Arc Sine

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.

  • Page 221
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS files. Instruction Operation When the rung is true, this instruction shall compute arc-sine of the Source and place the result in Destination.
  • Page 222: Acs — Arc Cosine

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.

  • Page 223: Atn — Arc Tangent

    Arc Tangent Source N7:0 Execution Time for the ATN Instruction 0< Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 146.7510 µs 0.3740 µs long word 146.4885 µs 0.4088 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 224
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 225: Deg — Radians To Degrees

    Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False Dest N7:1 0< MicroLogix 1400 word 27.7310 µs 0.4106 µs long word 31.2470 µs 0.4098 µs The DEG instruction converts the Source(in radians) to degrees and store the result in the Destination.

  • Page 226
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 227: Rad — Degrees To Radians

    Execution Time for the RAD Instruction Degrees to Radians Source N7:0 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False Dest N7:1 0< MicroLogix 1400 word 23.0610 µs 0.4070 µs long word 26.211 µs 0.3790 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 228
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 229: Ln — Natural Log

    Natural Log Source N7:0 Execution Time for the LN Instruction 0< Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 127.3260 µs 0.4094 µs long word 130.3635 µs 0.4094 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 230
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 231: Log — Base 10 Logarithm

    Log Base 10 Source N7:0 Execution Time for the LOG Instruction 0< Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 112.7110 µs 0.7686 µs long word 19.8070 µs 0.7694 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 232
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 233: Xpy — X Power Y

    Execution Time for the XPY Instruction 0< Source B N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False Dest N7:2 0< MicroLogix 1400 word 66.2050 µs 0.3920 µs long word 69.0550 µs 0.3548 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 234
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 235
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions XPY Instruction Operation Inputs Conditions Output Source A Source B Destination S:2/14 S:0/3-0 S:5/0 Destination Type Type Type S, Z, V, C W,DW, F W,DW, F Source A > 0 && 0,0,0,0 (A)**(B) (A)**(B) is +NRM W,DW, F W,DW, F Source A >…
  • Page 236: Cpt — Compute

    Execution Time for the CPT Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 word 4.8535 µs 0.6610 µs The CPT instruction performs copy, arithmetic, logical, and conversion operations. You define the operation in the Expression and the result is written in the Destination.

  • Page 237
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 238
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Math Instructions CPT Instruction Operation Sub Instructions Symbol Covert to BCD From BCD to Binary Natural Log Base 10 Log Tangent Sine Cosine Arc Tangent Arc Sine Arc Cosine Absolute Value Radians to Degrees Degrees to Radians X to the Power Y * *(XPY) MATH FLAGS EFFECTS…
  • Page 239: Application Specific Instructions

    Instruction Type: Output Clock Execution Time for the RHC Instruction Read High Speed Clock Dest N9:0 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 word 2.5910 µs 0.2150 µs long word 3.1210 µs 0.1802 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 240
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 241: Rpc — Read Program Checksum

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.

  • Page 242: Tdf — Compute Time Difference

    Data Size When Rung Is: Stop N7:1 True False Dest N7:2 MicroLogix 1400 word 5.9770 µs 0.2219 µs long word 7.2150 µs 0.2035 µs The Compute Time Difference Instruction (TDF) is used to calculate the number of 10 µs ticks between any two time-stamps captured using the RHC instruction.

  • Page 243
    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are only for use with MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) The Data Log Status file can only be used for the following math instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, and SCP.
  • Page 244
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Application Specific Instructions Any TDF instruction with a double word address computes the time difference between 2 timestamps captured within 42949.67295 seconds of each other (4294967295 10 µsec ticks). It calculates an invalid result if more than 42949.67295 seconds have elapsed between the start and stop timestamps.
  • Page 245: Conversion Instructions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Conversion Instructions The conversion instructions multiplex and de-multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values. Instruction Used To: Page DCD — Decode 4 to 1-of-16 Decodes a 4-bit value (0…15), turning on the corresponding bit in the 16-bit destination.

  • Page 246: Dcd — Decode 4 To 1-Of-16

    Dest N7:1 True False 0000000000000000< MicroLogix 1400 4.6300 µs 0.2720 µs The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source word to set one bit of the destination word. All other bits in the destination word are cleared. The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table…

  • Page 247: Enc — Encode 1-Of-16 To 4

    N7:0 0000000000000000< True False Dest N7:1 MicroLogix 1400 5.7230 µs 0.3660 µs 0000h< The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit, looking for the first bit set. The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer. The ENC instruction converts the values as…

  • Page 248: Frd — Convert From Binary Coded Decimal (Bcd)

    Controller When Rung Is: From BCD True False Source 0000h< MicroLogix 1400 5.4790 µs 0.5151 µs Dest N7:0 0< The FRD instruction is used to convert the Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) source value to an integer and place the result in the destination.

  • Page 249
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Conversion Instructions • 32768 if the source is the math register (allowing a 5-digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S:13 and the high order digit in S:14). If the source is the math register, it must be directly addressed as S:13. S:13 is the only status file element that can be used.
  • Page 250
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Conversion Instructions To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD, the source must be the Math Register (S:13). You must reset the Minor Error Bit (S:5.0) to prevent an error. Example The BCD value 32,760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7:0.
  • Page 251
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Conversion Instructions Clearing S:14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below: MOVE 0001 0010 0011 0100 Source N7:2 4660 Dest S:13 4660 CLEAR Dest S:14 S:13 and S:14 are FROM BCD Source S:13 displayed in BCD format. 00001234 Dest N7:0…
  • Page 252: Tod — Convert To Binary Coded Decimal (Bcd)

    Dest N7:1 True False 0000h< MicroLogix 1400 5.9198 µs 0.3916 µs The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination. Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following…

  • Page 253
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Conversion Instructions If the destination is the math register, it must be directly addressed as S:13. S:13 is the only status file element that can be used. Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit: The Controller: S:0/0 Carry…
  • Page 254
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Conversion Instructions To BCD The destination value is Source N7:3 9760< displayed in BCD format. Dest N10:0 9760< N7:3 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 N7:0 4-digit BCD 1001 0111 0110 0000 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 255: Gcd — Gray Code

    Dest N7:1 True False 190< MicroLogix 1400 5.4970 µs 0.5618 µs The GCD instruction converts Gray code data (Source) to an integer value (Destination). If the Gray code input is negative (high bit set), the Destination is set to 32767 and the overflow flag is set.

  • Page 256
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Conversion Instructions Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 257: Using Logical Instructions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Logical Instructions The logical instructions perform bit-wise logical operations on individual words. Instruction Used To: Page AND — Bit-Wise AND Perform an AND operation OR — Logical OR Perform an inclusive OR operation XOR — Exclusive OR Perform an Exclusive Or operation NOT — Logical NOT Perform a NOT operation…

  • Page 258: Updates To Math Status Bits

    • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are valid for MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. (3) Source B does not apply to the NOT instruction. The NOT instruction only has one source value.

  • Page 259: And — Bit-Wise And

    Data Size When Rung Is: 0000h< Dest N7:2 True False 0000h< MicroLogix 1400 word 1.7894 µs 0.3781 µs long word 1.8185 µs 0.3967 µs The AND instruction performs a bit-wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination.

  • Page 260: Or — Logical Or

    Data Size When Rung Is: 0000h< Dest N7:2 True False 0000h< MicroLogix 1400 word 1.8278 µs 0.3962 µs long word 1.8374 µs 0.3956 µs The OR instruction performs a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination.

  • Page 261: Xor — Exclusive Or

    Data Size When Rung Is: 0000h< Dest N7:2 True False 0000h< MicroLogix 1400 word 4.9480 µs 0.3671 µs long word 4.8454 µs 0.3646 µs The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR of two sources and places the result in the destination.

  • Page 262: Not — Logical Not

    Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 1.3682 µs 0.4074 µs long word 1.3620 µs 0.3900 µs The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit-by-bit (one’s complement) and then place the result in the destination.

  • Page 263: Chapter 14 Mov — Move

    Dest N7:1 Controller Data Size When Rung Is: 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 1.4231 µs 0.3542 µs long word 1.4103 µs 0.3722 µs The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

  • Page 264
    • • • (1) PTOX and PWMX files are valid for MicroLogix 1400 BXB or BXBA unit. (2) See Important note about indirect addressing. (3) Some elements can be written to. Consult the function file for details. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS files.
  • Page 265
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Move Instructions If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags, use a copy (COP) instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 266: Mvm — Masked Move

    Data Size When Rung Is: 0000h< Dest N7:2 True False 0< MicroLogix 1400 word 0.2210 µs 0.1750 µs long word 1.9050 µs 0.2180 µs The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination, allowing portions of the destination to be masked. The mask…

  • Page 267
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Move Instructions Mask Example (Word Addressing Level) Word Value in Value in Binary Hexadecimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value in Destination FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Before Move Source Value 5555…
  • Page 268
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Move Instructions Math Status Bits With this Bit: The Controller: S:0/3 Sign Bit sets if the MSB of the destination is set, otherwise resets Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 269
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter File Instructions The file instructions perform operations on file data. Instruction Used To: Page CPW — Copy Word Copy words of data from one location to another COP — Copy File Copy a range of data from one file location to another FLL — Fill File Load a file with a program constant or a…
  • Page 270: Chapter 15 Cpw — Copy Word

    Controller When Rung Is: Length True False MicroLogix 1400 2.5630 µs 0.2034 µs The CPW instruction copies words of data, in ascending order, from one location (Source) to another (Destination). Although similar to the File Copy (COP) instruction, the CPW instruction allows different source and destination parameters.

  • Page 271: Cop — Copy File

    Length Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 3.6020 µs 0.1853 µs The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another. COP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 92.

  • Page 272
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS files. The source and destination file types must be the same except bit (B) and integer (N);…
  • Page 273: Fll — Fill File

    Dest #N7:1 Length Controller Data Size When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 word 3.1531 µs 0.5290 µs long word 3.2470 µs 0.3918 µs The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length. The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated.

  • Page 274: Bsl — Bit Shift Left

    When Rung Is: Length 1< True False MicroLogix 1400 6.1018 µs 5.8258 µs The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false-to-true rung transition, one bit at a time. The data is shifted left through the array, then unloaded, one bit at a time.

  • Page 275
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions Source Bit I:22/12 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16…73. 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 58 Bit Array #B3:1 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 RESERVED…
  • Page 276: Bsr — Bit Shift Right

    When Rung Is: Length 1< True False MicroLogix 1400 6.0790 µs 5.9942 µs If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan, you must create a loop in your application using the JMP, LBL, and CTU instructions. The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false-to-true rung transition, one bit at a time.

  • Page 277
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions Unload Bit (R6:0/10) 38 Bit Array #B3:2 INVALID Data block is shifted one bit at Source Bit a time from bit 69…32. I:23/06 This instruction uses the following operands: • File — The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated.
  • Page 278
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 92. Address Data Files Function Files Address Level Mode Parameter File •…
  • Page 279: Ffl — First In, First Out (Fifo) Load

    Data Size When Rung Is: FIFO #N7:1 Control R6:0 True False Length 1< MicroLogix 1400 word 8.2970 µs 6.1730 µs Position 0< long word 9.0910 µs 7.4630 µs On a false-to-true rung transition, the FFL instruction loads words or long words into a user-created file called a FIFO stack.

  • Page 280
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions • Control — This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words: Word 0 not used Word 1 Length — maximum number of words or long words in the stack.
  • Page 281: Ffu — First In, First Out (Fifo) Unload

    Data Size When Rung Is: Dest N7:1 Control R6:0 True False Length 1< MicroLogix 1400 word 8.7180 µs 6.6490 µs Position 0< long word 9.8890 µs 7.2150 µs On a false-to-true rung transition, the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user-created file called a FIFO stack. The data is unloaded using first-in, first-out order.

  • Page 282
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions • Destination — The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the FIFO stack. The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack and places it in the destination address.
  • Page 283
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, and DLS IMPORTANT files. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 284: Lfl — Last In, First Out (Lifo) Load

    Data Size When Rung Is: LIFO #N7:1 Control R6:0 True False Length 1< MicroLogix 1400 word 6.4950 µs 6.5650 µs Position 0< long word 7.3570 µs 7.0030 µs On a false-to-true rung transition, the LFL instruction loads words or long words into a user-created file called a LIFO stack.

  • Page 285
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions • Control — This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words: 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 not used Word 1…
  • Page 286: Lfu — Last In, First Out (Lifo) Unload

    Data Size When Rung Is: Dest N7:1 True False Control R6:0 Length 1< MicroLogix 1400 word 6.8227 µs 6.5089 µs Position 0< long word 7.6680 µs 7.2102 µs On a false-to-true rung transition, the LFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user-created file called a LIFO stack. The data is unloaded using last-in, first-out order (the data in the stack is not cleared after unloading).

  • Page 287
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive File Instructions • Control — This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words: 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 not used Word 1…
  • Page 288: Swp — Swap

    Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 1.0728 µs 0.1963 µs Use the SWP instruction to swap the low and high bytes of a specified number of words in a bit, integer, or string file. The SWP instruction has 2 operands: •…

  • Page 289
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines or processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation. They are typically time based or event driven. Instruction Used To: Page SQC — Sequencer Compare Compare 16-bit data with stored data SQO — Sequencer Output Transfer 16-bit data to word addresses…
  • Page 290: Chapter 16 Sqc- Sequencer Compare

    Compare Execution Time for the SQC Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is: Sequencer Compare File #B3:0 True False Mask N7:0 MicroLogix 1400 word 3.1762 µs 0.8505 µs Source I:0.0 Control R6:0 long word 3.2480 µs 0.9823 µs Length 1<…

  • Page 291
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Sequencer Instructions The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works. Sequencer Compare File #B10:11 Mask FFF0 Source I:3.0 Control R6:21 Length 4< Position 2< Input Word I:3.0 0010 0100 1001 1101 Mask Value FFF0 1111 1111 1111 0000…
  • Page 292
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Sequencer Instructions If mask is direct or indirect, the position selects the location in the specified file. • Source — This is the value that is compared to file. • Control — This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element.
  • Page 293: Sqo- Sequencer Output

    Control R6:0 Length 1< True False Position 0< MicroLogix 1400 word 3.6105 µs 0.9480 µs Long word 3.1920 µs 1.1850 µs On a false-to-true rung transition, the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination for the control of sequential machine operations.

  • Page 294
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Sequencer Instructions The bits mask data when reset (0) and pass data when set (1). The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits. The mask can be fixed or variable. It is fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code.
  • Page 295
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Sequencer Instructions This instruction uses the following operands: • File — This is the sequencer reference file. Its contents, on an element-by-element, basis are masked and stored in the destination. If file type is word, then mask and source must be words. If file type is long word, mask and source must be long words.
  • Page 296: Sql — Sequencer Load

    Data Size When Rung Is: Length 1< Position 0< True False MicroLogix 1400 word 2.7700 µs 1.1741 µs long word 2.8680 µs 1.2800 µs On a false-to-true rung transition, the SQL instruction loads words or long words into a sequencer file at each step of a sequencer operation. This instruction uses the following operands: •…

  • Page 297
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Sequencer Instructions • Source — The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file. The address level of the source must match the sequencer file. If file is a word type, then source must be a word type.
  • Page 298
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Sequencer Instructions (1) See Important note about indirect addressing. (2) File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies. (3) Control file only. You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC, PTOX, IMPORTANT PWMX, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, CS, IOS, LCD, and DLS files. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 299: Chapter 17 Jmp — Jump To Label

    Execution Time for the JMP Instruction Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.3290 µs 0.2320 µs The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution. Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number.

  • Page 300: Lbl — Label

    Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.2633 µs The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump (JMP) instruction to change the order of ladder execution. Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number.

  • Page 301: Ret — Return From Subroutine

    Return Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.3710 µs 0.2510 µs The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file. It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction, user interrupt, or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute.

  • Page 302: End — Program End

    Controller Instruction When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 1.2016 µs 1.2032 µs The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program. For the main program file (file 2), this instruction ends the program scan. For a subroutine, interrupt, or user fault file, the END instruction causes a return from subroutine.

  • Page 303: Publication 1766-Rm001A-En-P — October

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Program Control Instructions While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true, execution proceeds as if the zone were not present. When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false, the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false.

  • Page 304
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Program Control Instructions Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 305: Input And Output Instructions Iim — Immediate Input With Mask

    This instruction is used for embedded I/O only. It is not designed to be used Mask N7:0 with expansion I/O. Length Execution Time for the IIM Instruction Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 10.9098 µs 0.2064 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 306
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Input and Output Instructions The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan. This instruction uses the following operands: • Slot — This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file.
  • Page 307: Iom — Immediate Output With Mask

    Execution Time for the IOM Instruction Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 10.4010 µs 0.3220 µs The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan. This instruction uses the following operands: •…

  • Page 308: Ref- I/O Refresh

    When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 See MicroLogix 1400 Scan Time 0.1490 µs Calculation on page 550 The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I/O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels.

  • Page 309: Using Interrupts

    An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the task it is currently performing, perform a different task, and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended. The Micrologix 1400 supports the following User Interrupts: •…

  • Page 310
    6. resumes normal execution from the point where the controller program was interrupted When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted? The Micrologix 1400 controllers only allow interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan. They are: • At the start of a ladder rung •…
  • Page 311
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts The interrupt is only serviced by the controller at these opportunities. If the interrupt is disabled, the pending bit is set at the next occurrence of one of the three occasions listed above. If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL, OTE, or UIE, ATTENTION this instruction (OTL, OTE, or UIE) must be the last instruction executed on the rung (last instruction on last branch).
  • Page 312
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts The priorities from highest to lowest are: User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt0 Event Interrupt1 High-Speed Counter Interrupt0 Event Interrupt2 Event Interrupt3 High-Speed Counter Interrupt1 Selectable Timed Interrupt Event Interrupt4 High-Speed Counter Interrupt2 Event Interrupt5 High-Speed Counter Interrupt3 Event Interrupt6…
  • Page 313
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts Table 3: Recoverable Non-Recoverable Non-User Fault Recoverable Faults are caused Non-Recoverable Faults are Non-User Faults are caused by the user and may be caused by the user, and by various conditions that recovered from by executing cannot be recovered from.
  • Page 314: User Interrupt Instructions

    Execution Time for the INT Instruction Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 0.5460 µs 0.5460 µs The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine (ISR). This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true.

  • Page 315: Sts — Selectable Timed Start

    Time Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 20.8470 µs 0.2125 µs The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts. The STI instruction has one operand: •…

  • Page 316: Uid — User Interrupt Disable

    Interrupt Types Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 2.7470 µs 0.1859 µs The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts. The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits: Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction…

  • Page 317: Uie — User Interrupt Enable

    Interrupt Types Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 3.4226 µs 0.1968 µs The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts. The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits: Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIE Instruction…

  • Page 318: Uif — User Interrupt Flush

    Interrupt Types Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 2.7930 µs 0.1847 µs The UIF instruction is used to flush (remove pending interrupts from the system) selected user interrupts. The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding flush bits:…

  • Page 319
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value EII — Event Input Interrupt Event 4 16384 bit 14 HSC — High-Speed Counter HSC2 8192 bit 13 EII — Event Input Interrupt Event 5 4096 bit 12…
  • Page 320: Using The Selectable Timed Interrupt (Sti) Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function File The Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements. The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive. Example of where you would use the STI are: •…

  • Page 321
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts Selectable Time Interrupt (STI) Function File Sub-Elements Summary Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File (STI:0) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN — Program File Number STI:0.PFN word (INT) control read only ER — Error Code…
  • Page 322
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts STI Error Code Error Recoverable Fault Description Code (Controller) Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3, greater than 255, or does not Number exist. STI User Interrupt Executing (UIX) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program…
  • Page 323
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts STI User Interrupt Pending (UIP) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP — User Interrupt Pending STI:0/UIP binary (bit) status read only The UIP (User Interrupt Pending) is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending.
  • Page 324: Using The Event Input Interrupt (Eii) Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts STI Error Detected (ED) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED — Error Detected STI:0/ED binary (bit) status read only The ED (Error Detected) flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the STI sub-system.

  • Page 325
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts Each EII can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight inputs (I1:0.0/0 to I1:0.0/7). Each EII can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals. When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal, the controller immediately scans the configured subroutine.
  • Page 326
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts EII Function File Sub-Elements EII Program File Number (PFN) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN — Program File Number EII:0.PFN word (INT) control read only PFN (Program File Number) defines which subroutine is called (executed) when the input terminal assigned to EII:0 detects a signal.
  • Page 327
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts EII User Interrupt Executing (UIX) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX — User Interrupt Executing EII:0/UIX binary (bit) status read only The UIX (User Interrupt Executing) bit is set whenever the EII mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PFN.
  • Page 328
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts EII User Interrupt Pending (UIP) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP — User Interrupt Pending EII:0/UIP binary (bit) status read only UIP (User Interrupt Pending) is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending.
  • Page 329
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts EII Error Detected (ED) Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED — Error Detected EII:0/ED binary (bit) status read only The ED (Error Detected) flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the EII sub-system.
  • Page 330
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Using Interrupts Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 331: Process Control Instruction

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Process Control Instruction This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1400 Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) instruction. The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature, pressure, liquid level, or flow rate using process loops.

  • Page 332: The Pid Equation

    Derivative 0.01…327.67 (minutes) (1) Applies to MicroLogix 1400 PID range when Reset and Gain Range (RG) bit is set to 1. For more information on reset and gain, see PLC 5 Gain Range (RG) on page 345. The derivative term (rate) provides smoothing by means of a low-pass filter.

  • Page 333: Pd Data File

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction PD Data File The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1400 controllers is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen-Bradley SLC 5/03 and higher processors. Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology.

  • Page 334: Pid — Proportional Integral Derivative

    Control Variable N7:1 True False Setup Screen MicroLogix 1400 7.1750 µs 7.0910 µs It is recommended that you place the PID instruction on a rung without any conditional logic. If conditional logic exists, the Control Variable output remains at its last value, and the CVP CV% term and integral term are both cleared when the rung is false.

  • Page 335: Input Parameters

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Input Parameters The table below shows the input parameter addresses, data formats, and types of user program access. See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter. Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User For More…

  • Page 336
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Setpoint (SPS) Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SPS — Setpoint PD10:0.SPS word (INT) control read/write 0…16383 (1) The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled. With scaling, the range is from minimum scaled (MINS) to maximum scaled (MAXS).
  • Page 337
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Setpoint MIN (MINS) Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access MINS — Setpoint PD10:0.MINS word -32,768…+32,767 control read/write Minimum (INT) If the SPV is read in engineering units, then the MINS (Setpoint Minimum) parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value.
  • Page 338
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Output Limit (OL) Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access OL — Output Limit PD10:0/OL binary 1 = enabled control read/write 0 = disabled An enabled (1) value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD10:0.CVH (Control Variable High) and PD10.0.CVL (Control Variable Low).
  • Page 339: Output Parameters

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Control Variable Low Limit (CVL) Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CVL — Control PD10:0.CVL word 0…100% control read/write Variable Low Limit (INT) When the output limit bit (PD10:0/OL) is enabled (1), the CVL (Control Value Low) you enter is the minimum output (in percent) that the Control Variable attains.

  • Page 340
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Control Variable Percent (CVP) Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CVP — Control Variable Percent PD10:0.CVP word (INT) 0…100 control status read CVP (Control Variable Percent) displays the control variable as a percentage.
  • Page 341: Tuning Parameters

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Tuning Parameters The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses, data formats, and types of user program access. See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter. Table 1: Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User For More…

  • Page 342
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Controller Gain (K Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access KC — Controller Gain — K PD10:0.KC word (INT) 0…32,767 control read/write Gain K (word 3) is the proportional gain, ranging from 0…3276.7 (when RG = 0), or 0…327.67 (when RG = 1).
  • Page 343
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Rate Term (T Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TD — Rate Term — T PD 10:0.TD word (INT) 0…32,767 control read/write Rate T (word 5) is the Derivative term. The adjustment range is 0 to 327.67 minutes.
  • Page 344
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Time Mode (TM) Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access TM — Time Mode PD10:0.TM binary 0 or 1 control read/write The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode (1) or STI mode (0).
  • Page 345
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Zero Crossing Deadband (ZCD) Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access ZCD — Zero Crossing PD10:0.ZCD word (INT) 0…32,767 control read/write Deadband The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered.
  • Page 346
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Automatic / Manual (AM) Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AM — Automatic/Manual PD10:0/AM binary (bit) 0 or 1 control read/write The auto/manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program.
  • Page 347
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction PLC 5 Gain Range (RG) Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access RG — PLC 5 Gain Range PD10:0/RG binary (bit) 0 or 1 control read/write When set (1), the reset (TI) and gain range enhancement bit (RG) causes the reset minute/repeat value and the gain multiplier (KC) to be divided by a factor of 10.
  • Page 348
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Loop Update Too Fast (TF) Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TF — Loop Update Too PD10:0/TF binary (bit) 0 or 1 status read/write Fast The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations.
  • Page 349
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction CV Lower Limit Alarm (LL) Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LL — CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10:0/LL binary (bit) 0 or 1 status read/write The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set (1) when the calculated CV output is less than the lower CV limit.
  • Page 350
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Enable (EN) Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access EN — Enable PD10:0/EN binary (bit) 0 or 1 status read only The PID enabled bit is set (1) whenever the PID instruction is enabled. It follows the rung state.
  • Page 351: Runtime Errors

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Runtime Errors Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime error occurs. Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions, each of which has been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSB of the second word of the control block.

  • Page 352: Analog I/O Scaling

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Analog I/O Scaling To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction, the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters. In the MicroLogix 1400, the process variable (PV) in the PID instruction is designed to work with a data range of 0…16,383.

  • Page 353: Application Notes

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction The configuration for the analog output is virtually identical. Simply address the PID control variable (CV) to the analog output address and configure the analog output to “Scaled for PID” behavior. Application Notes The following paragraphs discuss: •…

  • Page 354
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Input/Output Ranges The input module measuring the process variable (PV) must have a full scale binary range of 0…16383. If this value is less than 0 (bit 15 set), then a value of zero is used for PV and the “Process var out of range” bit is set (bit 12 of word 0 in the control block).
  • Page 355
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Scaling to Engineering Units Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero-crossing deadband values in engineering units, and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units. Remember, the process variable PV must still be within the range 0…16383.
  • Page 356
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Zero-Crossing Deadband DB The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range. This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output.
  • Page 357
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Output Limiting with Anti-Reset Windup You may set an output limit (percent of output) on the control variable. When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit, it sets an alarm bit (bit LL for lower limit, bit UL for upper limit), and prevents the control variable from exceeding either limit value.
  • Page 358: Application Examples

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction PID Rung State If the PID rung is false, the integral sum (IS) is cleared and CV remains in its last state. Feed Forward or Bias Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance.

  • Page 359
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction 2. Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules. Download your program to the processor. Leave the processor in the program mode. Ensure that all possibilities of machine motion have been considered with ATTENTION respect to personal safety and equipment damage.
  • Page 360
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction Record the gain value. Return to the MANUAL mode (stop the process if necessary). 10. Set the loop update time (and STI time interval if applicable) to a value of 5 to 10 times faster than the natural period. For example, if the cycle time is 20 seconds, and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate, set the loop update time to 200, which would result in a 2-second rate.
  • Page 361
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction – type: 0 for CO% 2. Enter the REM RUN mode and verify that PV=0. 3. Type: 20 in CO% 4. Record the PV = _______ 5. Type: 40 in CO%. 6. Record the PV = _______ 7.
  • Page 362
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Process Control Instruction 4. Watch the PV. When the PV starts to change, stop your stopwatch. Record this value. It is the deadtime. 5. Multiply the deadtime by 4. This value approximates the natural period. For example, if deadtime = 3 seconds, then 4 x 3 = 12 seconds (≅…
  • Page 363: Ascii Instructions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter ASCII Instructions This chapter contains general information about the ASCII instructions and explains how they function in your control program. This chapter is arranged into the following sections: • Instruction Types and Operation on page 362 General Information •…

  • Page 364: Instruction Types And Operation

    These instructions use or alter the communication channel for receiving or transmitting data. All ASCII port control instructions support channel 2, as well as channel 0. The following table lists the ASCII port control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1400 controllers: Table 21.2 MicroLogix 1400…

  • Page 365: Protocol Overview

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions When any of the other port control instructions are encountered in a ladder logic program, it may or may not execute immediately depending on the contents of the ASCII queue. The ASCII queue is a FIFO (first-in, first-out) queue which can contain up to 16 instructions.

  • Page 366: String (St) Data File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions See on page 624 for the ASCII parameters that you set via the Channel 0 configuration screens in your programming software. Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro.

  • Page 367: Control Data File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions String Data File Structure String Element Word upper byte lower byte String Length — number of characters (range is from 0…82) character 0 character 1 character 2 character 3 ↓ ↓ ↓ character 78 character 79 character 80 character 81…

  • Page 368
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Control Data File File Description The control data element is used by ASCII instructions to store control information required to operate the instruction. The control data element for ASCII instructions includes status and control bits, an error code byte, and two character words as shown below: ASCII Instructions Control Data File Elements Control Element…
  • Page 369: Acl — Ascii Clear Buffers

    The ACL instruction clears the Receive and/or Transmit buffer(s). This instruction also removes instructions from ASCII queue. For MicroLogix 1400, the ACL instruction can also be used to clear the DF1 communication buffers when the channel is configured for any of the DF1 communication drivers.

  • Page 370: Aic — Ascii Integer To String

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions This instruction executes immediately upon the rung transitioning to a true state. Any ASCII transmissions in progress are terminated when the ACL instruction executes. The ASCII queue may contain up to 16 instructions that are waiting to run. Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: •…

  • Page 371: Awa — Ascii Write With Append

    Source N7:0 Controller Data Size When Instruction Is: Dest ST14:1 True False MicroLogix 1400 word 8.3032 µs 0.2591 µs long word 9.8913 µs 0.2155 µs The AIC instruction converts an integer or long word value (source) to an ASCII string (destination). The source can be a constant or an address.

  • Page 372
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions You configure append characters via the Channel Configuration screen. The default append characters are carriage return and line feed. Programming AWA Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions, always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or, send data on a time interval.
  • Page 373
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions – Characters Sent (.POS) may be smaller than String Length (.LEN) if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length (.LEN) field. – Characters Sent (.POS) can be greater than the String Length (.LEN) if the appended characters or inserted values from in-line indirection are used.
  • Page 374: Awt — Ascii Write

    Controller When Instruction Is: Characters Sent Error True False MicroLogix 1400 13.6110 µs 7.2706 µs Use the AWT instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device. Programming AWT Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions, always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that either detects when new data needs to be sent or, send data on a time interval.

  • Page 375
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: • Channel is the number of the RS-232 port, Channel 0. • Source is the string element you want to write. • Control is the control data file. See page 365. •…
  • Page 376: Abl — Test Buffer For Line

    1< True False Error 0< MicroLogix 1400 21.5621 µs 1.8710 µs The ABL instruction is used to determine the number of characters in the receive buffer of the specified communication channel, up to and including the end-of-line characters (termination). This instruction looks for the two termination characters that you configure via the channel configuration screen.

  • Page 377: Acb — Number Of Characters In Buffer

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: • Channel is the number of the RS-232 port, Channel 0. • Control is the control data file. See page 365. • Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds (0…1024).

  • Page 378: Aci — String To Integer

    2< True False Error 0< MicroLogix 1400 22.6154 µs 3.5250 µs Use the ACB instruction to determine the number of characters in the buffer. On a false-to-true transition, the controller determines the total number of characters and records it in the POS field of the control data file.

  • Page 379
    Dest N7:0 0< Controller Data Size When Instruction Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 word 6.5719 µs 0.2142 µs long word 7.1146 µs 0.1978 µs Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer (word or long word) value.
  • Page 380: Acn — String Concatenate

    ACN — String Instruction Type: output Concatenate Execution Time for the ACN Instruction String Concatenate Source A ST10:11 Controller When Instruction Is: Source B ST10:12 Dest ST10:10 True False MicroLogix 1400 9.4852 µs 0.1982 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 381: Aex — String Extract

    Error (1F39H) is written to the Major Error Fault Code word (S:6). AEX — String Extract Instruction Type: output String Extract Source ST10:0 Execution Time for the AEX Instruction Index Number Controller When Instruction Is: Dest ST10:3 True False MicroLogix 1400 10.0290 µs 0.1850 µs Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 382: Publication 1766-Rm001A-En-P — October

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions The AEX instruction creates a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and storing it in a new string. Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: • Source is the existing string. The Source value is not affected by this instruction.

  • Page 383: Ahl — Ascii Handshake Lines

    AND Mask 0002h OR Mask 0000h True False Control R6:2 MicroLogix 1400 26.5267 µs 2.9480 µs Channel Status 0000h< Error 0< The AHL instruction is used to set or reset the RS-232 Request to Send (RTS) handshake control line for a modem. The controller uses the two masks to determine whether to set or reset the RTS control line, or leave it unchanged.

  • Page 384
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions • Channel Status displays the current status (0000…001F) of the handshake lines for the specified channel. This status is read-only and resides in the .POS field in the control data file. The following shows how to determine the channel status value. In this example, the value is 001F.
  • Page 385: Ard — Ascii Read Characters

    Dest ST10:4 Control R6:3 True False String Length 10< MicroLogix 1400 9.3760 µs 7.7770 µs Characters Read 0< Error 0< Use the ARD instruction to read characters from the buffer and store them in a string. To repeat the operation, the rung must go from false-to-true.

  • Page 386: Arl — Ascii Read Line

    0< True False Error 0< MicroLogix 1400 33.9910 µs 8.5690 µs Use the ARL instruction to read characters from the buffer, up to and including the Termination characters, and store them in a string. The Termination characters are specified via the Channel Configuration screen.

  • Page 387
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions • String Length (LEN) is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer. The maximum is 82 characters. If you specify a length larger than 82, only the first 82 characters are read and moved to the destination.
  • Page 388: Asc — String Search

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions For information on the timing of this instruction, see the timing diagram on page 389. ASC — String Search Instruction Type: output String Search Source ST10:6 Execution Time for the ASC Instruction Index String Search ST10:7 Controller When Instruction Is:…

  • Page 389: Asr — Ascii String Compare

    ST10:8 True False Source B ST10:9 MicroLogix 1400 4.8596 µs 0.2016 µs Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings. The controller looks for a match in length and upper/lower case characters. If two strings are identical, the rung is true; if there are any differences, the rung is false.

  • Page 390
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below: ASR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 92. Address Function Files Address Level…
  • Page 391: Timing Diagram For Ard, Arl, Awa, And Awt Instructions

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Timing Diagram for ARD, ARL, AWA, and AWT Instructions Rung Condition Enable Bit (EN) Queue Bit (EU) Running Bit (RN) Done Bit Error Bit (DN or ER) 3 4 5 1 — rung goes true NOTE: The RN bit is not addressable 2 — instruction successfully queued via the Control (R) file.

  • Page 392: Ascii Instruction Error Codes

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Examples For the following examples: N7:0 = 25 N7:1 = -37 L9:0 = 508000 L9:1 = 5 Table: 0.D Valid in-line direction: Input: Flow rate is currently [N7:0] liters per minute and contains [L8:0] particles per liter contaminants.

  • Page 393
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive ASCII Instructions Table 21.4 Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 0x07 The instruction cannot be executed because the Reconfigure the channel and retry operation. communications channel has been shut down via the channel configuration menu. 0x08 The instruction cannot be executed because another Resend the transmission.
  • Page 394: Ascii Character Set

    > The standard ASCII character set includes values up to 127 decimal (7F hex). The MicroLogix 1400 Controller also supports an extended character set (decimal 128…255). However, the extended character set may display different characters depending on the platform you are using.

  • Page 395: Communications Instructions Messaging Overview

    • Configuring a Remote Message on page 442 • Configuring a Multi-hop Remote Message on EtherNet/IP Communication Channel on page 445 • Configuring a MicroLogix 1400 CIP Generic Message via Ethernet on page 461 • MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 466 •…

  • Page 396
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • Communication Queue These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller. For a message to transmit, it must be scanned on a true rung of logic. When scanned, the message and the data defined within the message (if it is a write message) are placed in a communication buffer.
  • Page 397
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • DF1 Radio Modem • Modbus RTU Master • Ethernet For a description of valid communication protocols, see Knowledgebase Quick Starts on page 629. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 398: Svc — Service Communications

    Execution Time for the SVC Instruction Service Communications Channel Select Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 39.8260 µs (CH0) 0.1933 µs (CH0) 5.9042 µs (CH1) 0.1857 µs (CH1) 36.5800 µs (CH0 & CH1) 0.1774 µs (CH0 & CH1) (1) This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file.

  • Page 399
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Controller Channel Select Setting Channel(s) Serviced MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 All Channels Communication Status Bits The following communication status bits allow you to customize or monitor communications servicing. See General Channel Status Block on page 64 for additional status information.
  • Page 400: Msg — Message

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions The example rung shows a conditional SVC, which is processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue. You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs. This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instruction. MSG — Message Instruction Type: output Read/Write Message…

  • Page 401: The Message Element

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions The Message Element The MSG instruction built into the controller uses a MG data file to process the message instruction. The MG data file, shown at left, is accessed using the MG prefix. Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file.

  • Page 402
    Status Code was received, the low byte is 0xE0 and the high byte of this sub-element contains detailed Status Code returned by CIP reply for MicroLogix 1400 Note: When SMTP sub-system cannot send an email due to some reason, error code is shown via MSG instruction. When messaging…
  • Page 403
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Message File Target Location Information Target Device = 485 CIF Sub- Name Description Paramete Size User Element Program Access Reserved Word read only MG11:0.TFN Target File Number Word read/write MG11:0.ELE Offset in elements into CIF Word read/write Reserved Word read only…
  • Page 404
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Message File Target Location Information Target Device = CIP Generic Sub- Name Description Paramete Size User Element Program Access Target Class Word read only Target Instance Word read/write CIP Send Data Count Word read/write Internal Physical Address of Word read only CIP Send Data Table…
  • Page 405
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Message File Sub-Element 17 — Status Bits Address Description Paramete Size User Program Access Reserved read only MG11:0.0/ST Start: read only 1 = MSG transmitted and acknowledged by target device 0 = MSG has not been received by target MG11:0.0/ Done…
  • Page 406
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions “Control Bits” Parameters Channel 0 Setup Screen Channel 1 Setup Screen Ignore if Timed Out (TO) Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11:0/TO Binary On or Off Control Read / Write The Timed Out Bit (TO) can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control.
  • Page 407
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 421, because it simplifies the user program. This built-in timeout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is non-zero. It defaults to 5 seconds for channel 0, so unless you change it, the internal timeout control is automatically enabled.
  • Page 408
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Error (ER) Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11:0/ER Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Error Bit (ER) is set when message transmission has failed. An error code is written to the MSG File. The ER bit and the error code are cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true.
  • Page 409: Timing Diagram For The Msg Instruction

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Timing Diagram for the The following section describes the timing diagram for a message instruction. MSG Instruction (3) Target node (5) Target node processes packet (1) Rung goes true. receives packet. successfully and returns data (read) or acknowledges receipt (write).

  • Page 410
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions 2. At the next end of scan, REF, or SVC instruction, the controller determines if it should examine the communications queue for another instruction. The controller bases its decision on the state of the channel’s Communication Servicing Selection (CSS) and Message Servicing Selection (MSS) bits, the network communication requests from other nodes, and whether previous message instructions are already in progress.
  • Page 411
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions 4. Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram. If you do not receive an ACK, step 3 does not occur. Instead, either no response or a negative acknowledge (NAK) is received. When this happens, the ST bit remains clear (0).
  • Page 412: Communication Servicing Selection And Message Servicing Selection

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Communication The following screen shows the channel configuration window for Communication Servicing Selection and Message Servicing Selection. Servicing Selection and Message Servicing Selection Communication Servicing Selection Use the check box to enhance communication capability. If the check box is unchecked, communication throughput (and scan time) will increase.

  • Page 413: Msg Instruction Ladder Logic

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions When the Communications Servicing Selection bit is unchecked, at the next execution of a Service Communications (SVC) instruction, I/O Refresh (REF) instruction, or when it performs Communications Servicing, whichever occurs first, commands/replies are processed as follows: •…

  • Page 414
    Input I:1/0 could be any user-supplied bit to control when messages are sent. Whenever I:1/0 is set and message MG11:0 is not enabled, the message instruction on rung 0001 is enabled. Internet (if required) Ethernet Switch 44583 MicroLogix 1400 NET-ENI/ENIW MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5/05 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 415: Local Messages

    DC SOURCE DC SOURCE DC SOURCE CABLE CABLE CABLE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix 1500 44584 Example 2 — Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface (1761-NET-DNI) SLC 5/03 with 1747-SDN PanelView 550 PanelView DANGER DANGER Master DeviceNet Network…

  • Page 416: Configuring A Local Message

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Example 3 — Local DF1 Half-Duplex Network RS-232 (DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol) Modem MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix SLC 5/04 (Slave) SLC 5/03 with 1747-KE 1000 (Slave) 1400 (Slave) 1500 (Slave) Interface Module (Slave) 44586 Configuring a Local Message Setup Screen Message The rung below shows a MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic.

  • Page 417
    “This Controller” Parameters Channel The MicroLogix 1400 supports Channel 0 and Channel 1 messaging. Channel 0 is the RS-232/RS-485 port and Channel 1 is the Ethernet port. If Channel 0 is selected with that channel configured for Modbus RTU Master, then the next line will display “Modbus Command”.
  • Page 418
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Communication Command The controller supports six different types of communications commands. If the target device supports any of these command types, the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device. Supported commands include: Communication Command Types Communication Description…
  • Page 419
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Modbus Command The controller supports eight Modbus commands. If the target device supports any of these Modbus command types, the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device. Supported Modbus commands include: Modbus Command Types Modbus Command Used For…
  • Page 420
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Data Table Address This variable defines the starting address in the local controller. Valid file types for the Data Table Address are shown below: Message Read Message Write Bit (B) Output (O) Timer (T) Input (I) Counter (C) Bit (B)
  • Page 421
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • For Read Messages: When a read message is used, the destination file is the data file in the local or originating processor. Input, output, string, and RTC file types are not valid for read messages.
  • Page 422
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message Modbus B, N (command 5) 1-bit Commands B, N (command 6) 1-word B, N 1-bit 1920 Modbus bit elements (commands 1, 2, and 15) (120 words) (Commands 1 and 2 are read only, 15 is write only.)
  • Page 423
    Modbus commands). The maximum timeout value is 255 seconds. Message Timeout for any MicroLogix 1400 channel 1 MSG can not be modified in the Ethernet Message Setup dialog box. It is assigned by the processor and is determined by adding the Channel 1 MSG Connection Timeout to the MSG Reply Timeout, then adding 15 seconds.
  • Page 424
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Data Table Address/Offset This variable defines the starting address in the target controller. The data table address is used for a 500CPU and PLC5 type messages. A valid address is any valid, configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the controller.
  • Page 425: Local Messaging Examples

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix, and does not get entered into the MB Data Address field when configuring the message instruction. When the message is sent, the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4-character hex number to be transmitted via the network (with a range of 0-FFFFh);…

  • Page 426
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • 485CIF message type • PLC5 message type • Modbus RTU Message type • EtherNet/IP Message type • Write Message type with ST data file A summary of the message instruction configuration parameters is shown in the following table.
  • Page 427
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Parameter Description This Controller Channel Identifies the communication channel. Channel 0, Channel 1 or Channel 2 Communication Specifies the type of message. Valid types are: Command • 500CPU Read (500CPU, 485CIF, and PLC5 message types) •…
  • Page 428
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Parameter Description Target Device Message Timeout Defines the amount of time the controller waits for the reply before the message errors. A timeout of 0 seconds means that the controller waits indefinitely for a reply. Valid range is from 0…255 seconds.
  • Page 429
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging: Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types <—> read/write O, I, S, B, N, L , B, N, L <—>…
  • Page 430
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions integer file starting at word N7:0. If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes, error bit MG11:0/ER is set, indicating that the message timed out. Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging: Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types…
  • Page 431
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Example 3 — Local Read from a PLC-5 Message Instruction Setup In this example, the controller reads 10 elements from the target device’s (Local Node 2) N7 file, starting at word N7:50. The 10 words are placed in the controller’s integer file starting at word N7:0.
  • Page 432
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Example 4 — Configuring a Modbus Message This section describes how to configure a local message using the Modbus communication commands. Since configuration options are dependent on which channel is selected, the programming software has been designed to only show the options available for the selected channel.
  • Page 433
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions “This Controller” Parameters If a Channel configured for Modbus Master is selected in the Channel field of the Message Setup Screen, the following Modbus Command options will become available: • 01 Read Coil Status (0xxxx) •…
  • Page 434
    Example 5 — Configuring an Ethernet/IP Message This section describes how to configure a local message when you are use Ethernet communication channel 1 of the MicroLogix 1400. Message Setup Screen Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro message (MSG) instruction preceded by conditional logic.
  • Page 435
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions “This Controller” Parameters Channel You must select Channel 1 (Integral) to use Ethernet pathways for messaging. Communication Command The controller supports seven different types of communication commands. If the target device supports any of these command types, the controller should be capable of exchange data with the device.
  • Page 436
    Each RI File Element consists of Sub-Elements 0 through 19 as shown in the following table. To reach another MicroLogix 1400, an SLC 5/05, a PLC-5E or a controller connected to Ethernet via a 1761-NET-ENI, simply enter in the destination IP address.
  • Page 437
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Routing Information File Element Sub- Description Element Subtype of Ethernet Message: • 16 (0x10) for normal Multi-Hop MSG • 17 (0x11) for Remote Multi-Hop MSG for a DH+ Network High word of 32-bit target IP address Low word of 32-bit target IP address 8…15 Internal Object Identifier (IOI) size in words (1…5)
  • Page 438
    MG11:0/ER is set, indicating that the message timed out. If the target device is another MicroLogix 1400, a SLC 5/05, a PLC-5E or a controller connected to Ethernet via a 1761-NET-ENI, then simply enter in the device’s IP address in the “To Address”…
  • Page 439
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions If the target device is a ControlLogix, FlexLogix or CompactLogix controller with an Ethernet interface, then enter in the interface’s IP address in the first row of the “To Address” column, press the computer’s Insert key to add a hop.
  • Page 440
    Communications Instructions Example 6 — Configuring Local Write message with ST file The MicroLogix 1400 can use a message instruction to transfer string file data to target device (SLC5/0x, 1756-L1) The following message setup screen is used to send local PLC5 write to the 1756-L1 via 1756-ENBT module.
  • Page 441: Remote Messages

    In this example, node 12 on DH-485 is a MicroLogix 1400. The MicroLogix 1400 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH+ network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH+ network.

  • Page 442
    CHS GND CHS GND DC SOURCE DC SOURCE DC SOURCE CABLE CABLE CABLE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1400 SLC 5/04 DH+ Network Node 19 Node 51 Node 40 SLC 5/04 PLC-5 44587 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 443
    CHS GND CHS GND CHS GND DC SOURCE CABLE DC SOURCE CABLE DC SOURCE CABLE DC SOURCE CABLE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5/05 Ethernet Network SLC 5/05 PLC-5E 44588 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 444: Configuring A Remote Message

    SLC 5/04 (node 51 on the DH+ network) starting at address N:50:0. The SLC 5/04 at Node 23 of the DH+ network is configured for passthru operation. The MicroLogix 1400 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 in this example. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 445
    DC SOURCE CABLE DC SOURCE CABLE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1400 SLC 5/04 DH+ Network Node 23 octal (19 decimal) Link ID = 100 Node 63 octal (51 decimal) Node 40 octal (32 decimal) SLC 5/04 PLC-5 44587 “This Controller”…
  • Page 446
    This variable defines the bridge address on the local network. In the example, DH-485 node 12 (MicroLogix 1400 on Link ID 1) is writing data to node 51 (SLC 5/04 on Link ID 100). The SLC 5/04 at node 17 is the bridge device.
  • Page 447: Configuring A Multi-Hop Remote Message On Ethernet/Ip Communication Channel

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Network Link ID Set the Network Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen. The Link ID value is a user-defined number between 1 and 65,535. All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local network must have the same number for this variable.

  • Page 448
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Network Message Example 1: MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet to SLC5/04 DH+ via ENET & DHRIO The following illustrates the MicroLogix 1400 (CH1 Ethernet) sending a remote message to a SLC5/04 processor (DH+ Node 51). The remote message will s an ENET module, a ControlLogix chassis (Gateway) and a DHRIO module.
  • Page 449
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions MicroLogix 1400 CH1 Configuration DHRIO Routing table creation To create a DHRIO Routing table open up RSLinx and under Communication select RSWho. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 450
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Select a driver that will allow you to see and connect up to the DHRIO module. Right Click your mouse on top of the DHRIO module and a drop down box will open. Select Module Configuration by clicking with the left mouse button. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 451
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Select DHRIO Routing Table tab. If no routing table has been created the following should appear. Right click on the Backplane and left click on Edit Module. Make sure that the Back plane Link ID is set to 20. Right click on the 1756-DHRIO module and left click on Edit Module.
  • Page 452
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions The following is the logic necessary for the MicroLogix 1400 processor. A MSG route must be configured in the MultiHop tab of the MSG Setup Screen. Click on the MultiHop tab. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 453
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Enter in the IP address of the 1756 ENET module, select ControlLogix backplane, press the Insert key and enter in the backplane slot numbers of the DHRIO module (0-16) under the ‘To Address’ fields. Click on the ControlLogix Backplane to highlight it and press the Insert key on your computer’s keyboard to add another hop.
  • Page 454
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Network Message Example 2: MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet to SLC 5/03 DH485 via ENET, DHRIO and 1785-KA5 bridge device The following illustrates the MicroLogix 1400 (CH1 Ethernet) sending a remote message to a SLC5/03 processor (DH+ Node 51). The remote message will passthru an ENET module, a ControlLogix chassis (Gateway), a DHRIO module and a 1785-KA5 bridge device.
  • Page 455
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions DHRIO Routing table creation Go to the routing table configuration tab. Right-click on the DHRIO channel being used and select Add Module. Select the DH+ Bridge. Enter the DH+ node number of the KA5 (37 in this example), and the Link ID of the DH485 (13 in this example).
  • Page 456
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions ML1400 Channel1 Configuration The following is the message setup screen for the MicroLogix 1400 controller. A MSG route must be configured in the MultiHop tab of the MSG Setup Screen. Click on the MultiHop tab.
  • Page 457
    Source Link ID and address, as well as Destination Link ID and address. The MicroLogix 1400 can send remote ethernet messages using EtherNet/ IP messages. The local version of EtherNet/IP messages use the 0x4B Execute PCCC service code, whereas the remote version needs to use the 0x4C Execute DH+ service code.
  • Page 458
    DH-485 message. Selecting remote in the selectable local/remote field shows two new fields: Remote Station Address and Remote Bridge Link ID Also, following set up is needed in RSLinx side for MicroLogix 1400 unsolicited MSG communication with OPC client. • Remote Bridge Link ID 15 (dec) •…
  • Page 459
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions 2. Configure Remote Routing Configuration After selecting Remote Addressing and clicking on the Configure button, select the 1785-KA5 Bridge/5130-KA for the Bridge Device. Select DH+ for the Remote Network Type and Local ID is set to 15(dec), Local KA5 is set to 63(dec).
  • Page 460
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions 2. Add a new group: 3. Add a new item: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 461
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions 4. Note that the “Sub Quality” will be “Bad” until an unsolicited message is received: 4. Configure the ML1400 MSG instruction ML1400 Channel 1 Network Link ID must be matched with the DDE/OPC Topic Remote ID configured in step #2 (0, in this example).
  • Page 462
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 463: Configuring A Micrologix 1400 Cip Generic Message Via Ethernet

    The MicroLogix 1400 supports CIP Generic messages over ethernet port. This section describes how to configure a CIP Generic message when you MicroLogix 1400 CIP are use Ethernet communication channel 1 of the MicroLogix 1400. The Generic Message via Network Configuration is shown below.

  • Page 464
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions “This Controller” Parameters You must select CIP Generic in Communication Command field. Also the size of bytes(receive or send) is the length of service data to be sent or received in the message. “Target Device” Parameters Extended Routing Information File The CIP generic communication command requires an extended routing information file type, RIX, to store the longer path information for CIP…
  • Page 465
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Extended Routing Information File Element Sub- Description Element Subtype of Ethernet Message: 19 (0x13) for CIP Generic MSG High word of 32-bit target IP address Low word of 32-bit target IP address ASA Service to 8 7 to Internal Object Identifier (IOI) size in words (1 to 5)
  • Page 466
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Service Type Pull-Down List Auto-Fill fields Service Service Code Class Instance Attribute Custom Read Assembly 0x0E 0x04 Write Assembly 0x10 0x04 Read Output Point 0x0E 0x10 Write Output Point 0x10 0x09 Read Input point 0x0E 0x08 Read Parameter…
  • Page 467
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions When the message is replied successfully, a user can check configuration parameters in Receive Data tab. CIP Generic Error Codes/Internal Fail Codes When CIP Generic sub-system cannot send a message due to some reason or reply contains error code, error code is shown via MSG instruction.
  • Page 468: Msg Instruction Error Codes

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions MSG Instruction Error When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data, the processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can Codes monitor from your programming software. Error Code Description of Error Condition Target node is busy.

  • Page 469
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Error Code Description of Error Condition PCCC Description: Remote station problem due to download. PCCC Description: Cannot execute command due to active IPBs. No IP address configured for the network, or Bad command — unsolicited message error, or Bad address — unsolicited message error, or No privilege — unsolicited message error, or Multihop messaging cannot route request…
  • Page 470: Special Function With Msg Instruction

    • Codes E0 to EF represent EXT STS codes 0 to F. • Codes F0 to FC represent EXT STS codes 10 to 1C. Special Function with MicroLogix 1400 supports the configuration of IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Default Domain Name, Primary Name Server, and MSG instruction Secondary Name Server in the Ethernet Channel Configuration File via Ethernet MSG instruction.

  • Page 471
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions General MSG Setup Screen to change IP Address MultiHop Setup Screen to change IP Address Setup String Data File Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 472
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • Channel : Channel must be “1 (Integral)”. • Communication command : Communication command must be “485 CIF Write”. • Data Table Address : Data Table Address must be a String file. To change Ethernet Channel Configuration, you must enter the characters for the configuration parameter.
  • Page 473
    Ethernet communication channel 1 of the MicroLogix 1400. Setup SMTP Configuration File While the processor is selected to MicroLogix 1400, “SMTP Client Enable” check box is shown in the Ethernet Channel Configuration tab. If this check box is checked, SMTP configuration page will be appeared.
  • Page 474
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions SMTP Client Enable Bit Setup Screen SMTP Configuration Setup Screen The following is an explanation of parameters to be configured: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 475
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • Email Server : email Server IP Address or DNS name. As for the input of DNS name, you should make sure if the Default Domain Name has been configured in the Ethernet Channel Configuration. If it was configured in the Ethernet Channel Configuration, DNS Sub-system will query total DNS name to DNS server.
  • Page 476: Configure Msg Setup Screen To Send Smtp Message

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Configure MSG Setup The picture below provides an example of how the MSG Instruction would be configured to be used to send SMTP message. Screen to send SMTP message General MSG Setup Screen for SMTP messaging The picture below shows MultiHop setup screen and configured e-mail subject and Body using ST file.

  • Page 477
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Setup String Data File • Channel : Channel must be “1 (Integral)”. • Communication command : Communication command must be “485 CIF Write”. • Data Table Address : Data Table Address must be a String file and the String file must contain Email Subject and Email Body.
  • Page 478
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions • Local / Remote : “Local / Remote” has no impact on the operation. • MultiHop : Cannot edit. • Routing Information File : Routing Information File must be Routing Information File. • Break Connection (BK) : If this bit is cleared for SMTP messaging, the connection with the SMTP Server is not closed after the SMTP message is sent out to the SMTP Server.
  • Page 479
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions SMTP Authentication Encoding If the SMTP Authentication Flag is enabled, MicroLogix 1400 sends encoded Username and Password. There are several Authentication methods; login, plain, cram-md5, and etc. But, MicroLogix 1400 supports only the login method. Base64 encoding is used to login to SMTP server.
  • Page 480
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Communications Instructions Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 481: Chapter 23 Overview

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Chapter Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Overview The socket interface allows you use a MicroLogix controller to communicate, via the Ethernet Subsystem, with Ethernet devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP application protocol, such as bar code scanners, RFID readers, or other standard Ethernet devices.

  • Page 482
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging You can partition the 8 available socket instances between UDP and TCP sockets by: • Using all 8 instances for client TCP connections. • Using all 8 instances to listen for incoming TCP connections and then accept 8 connections from other device.
  • Page 483
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Additionally, each Write does not require an application response or acknowledgement. The application protocol determines the exact sequence of application transactions. Typical Sequence of Transactions for a TCP Client MSG in Ladder Ethernet Subsystem Remote Ethernet Device Program…
  • Page 484
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging The exact sequence of sending and receiving data depends on the application protocol. Typical Sequence of Transactions for a TCP Server MSG in Ladder Ethernet Subsystem Remote Ethernet Device Program 10.10.10.10 10.10.10.11 CreateSocket…
  • Page 485
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging each Write does not require an application response or acknowledgement. The application protocol determines the exact sequence of application transactions. Typical Sequence of Transactions for UDP Without OpenConnection MSG in Ladder Ethernet Subsystem Remote Ethernet Device Program…
  • Page 486
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Typical Sequence of Transactions for UDP With OpenConnection MSG in Ladder Ethernet Subsystem Remote Ethernet Device Program 10.10.10.10 10.10.10.11 Write Data = abc Data = abc Receive Data From Port = 49200 Write Response The response is returned to the controller as soon as the data is sent…
  • Page 487: Communicate With The Socket Object Via A Msg Instruction

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Communicate With the In MicroLogix controller programs, you can use a CIP Generic MSG instruction to request socket services. Socket Object Via a MSG Instruction Configure the MSG with these values. Message Parameters CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description…

  • Page 488
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Message Parameters CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Service Code Each socket service has a unique service code: • CreateSocket : 4B (hexadecimal) • OpenConnection : 4C (hexadecimal) • AcceptConnection : 50 (hexadecimal) •…
  • Page 489
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Message Parameters CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Error Code(Hex) See Possible Error Codes for Socket Services on page 508. Error Description See Possible Error Codes for Socket Services on page 508. To Address in MultiHop tab Always specify “127.0.0.1”.
  • Page 490
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging For Write service to UDP sockets, the size application data cannot exceed the maximums listed for Read and Write services. Service Timeouts You must specify a Timeout parameter (in milliseconds) for any service that might not complete immediately (OpenConnection, AcceptConnection, Read, and Write).
  • Page 491: Programming Considerations

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging If you put the controller in Program mode before existing socket instances time out, the controller will disconnect all the connections and delete all the socket instances. Make sure the Inactivity Timeout is longer than the longest interval IMPORTANT between socket operations.

  • Page 492
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Change Controller Mode Between Executing and Non-Executing Executing mode includes Run, Remote Run, Test Continuous Scan, and Test Single Scan modes. Any others are Non-Executing modes. If the MicroLogix controller transitions from Executing to Non-executing mode while socket requests are active, all connections are closed and all instances are deleted.
  • Page 493: Socket Object Services

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging When issuing multiple Read services, be careful to adjust the destination data table that receives the data so that data is not overwritten. This fragment of Structured Text logic shows an example of handling a partial Read service.

  • Page 494
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Socket Service Read Write DeleteSocket DeleteAllSockets The MicroLogix controller assumes that the outgoing data is in CIP byte order except the application data(data in Buf). The application data is sent out as it is.
  • Page 495
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging CreateSocket The CreateSocket service creates an instance of the Socket object. The service returns an instance number that you use in the subsequent socket operations. Call the CreateSocket service with instance 0 (Socket object class). Parameter Value Service Type…
  • Page 496
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Attribute Data Table Address (Send) Specify N file Size in Bytes (Send) 12 bytes Data Table Address (Receive) Specify N file Size in Bytes (Receive) 4 bytes Extended Routing Info File(RIX) Specify RIX file…
  • Page 497
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging OpenConnection The OpenConnection service does one of the following: • For TCP, opens a TCP connection with the specified destination address. • For UDP, associates a destination IP address and port number with the specified socket.
  • Page 498
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Configure the MSG with these values: CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Channel 1 (Integral) Communication Command CIP Generic Service Custom Service Code 4C (hexadecimal) Class 342 (hexadecimal) Instance 0 Use a relay ladder instruction to move the returned instance number from a CreateSocket service into the MGx:y.TFN element of a MSG instruction.
  • Page 499
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging • Reserved : Specify 0. • DestAddr Data : Specify an array of characters (maximum of 64) to define the destination of the connection. Specify either of these: • Hostname?port=xxx •…
  • Page 500
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging MSG Configuration Parameters To call this service, click «Setup Screen» in the MSG instruction and enter the values displayed below. Configure the MSG with these values: CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Channel 1 (Integral)
  • Page 501
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Extended Routing Info File(RIX) Specify RIX file To Address in MultiHop tab 127.0.0.1 Considerations : Create a separate socket instance (CreateSocket) for each port number that will accept connections.
  • Page 502
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Read The Read service reads data on a socket. You can specify a number of bytes to receive. The Read service returns the number of bytes received. For TCP, the Read service returns when any data is received, up to the requested number of bytes.
  • Page 503
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Configure the MSG with these values: CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Channel 1 (Integral) Communication Command CIP Generic Service Custom Service Code 4D (hexadecimal) Class 342 (hexadecimal) Instance 0 Use a relay ladder instruction to move the returned instance number from a CreateSocket service into the MGx:y.TFN element of a MSG instruction.
  • Page 504
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging N file for receiving contains: 12 bytes + n bytes Nx:0 Nx:1 Nx:2, Nx:3 Nx:4 Nx:5 Nx:6… FromAddr FromAddr FromAddr BufLen Reserved Family Port IP Address (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (n bytes) (2 bytes) (2 bytes)
  • Page 505
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging MSG Configuration Parameters To call this service, click «Setup Screen» in the MSG instruction and enter the values displayed below. Configure the MSG with these values: CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Channel 1 (Integral)
  • Page 506
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Extended Routing Info File(RIX) Specify RIX file To Address in MultiHop tab 127.0.0.1 Considerations : For TCP connections, ToAddr is ignored. Connectionless UDP messages may use the address stored in the open connection service.
  • Page 507
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging If «SEND N7:2 = [N7:2]» is written in the Buf field of the N file, «[N7:2]» is replaced to a string of the value of N7:2. For example, if N7:2 contains a data 39, the string «SEND N7:2 = 39″…
  • Page 508
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging MSG Configuration Parameters To call this service, click «Setup Screen» in the MSG instruction and enter the values displayed below. Configure the MSG with these values: CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Channel 1 (Integral)
  • Page 509
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging N file for sending contains : 0 bytes — NONE N file for receiving contains : 0 bytes — NONE DeleteAllSockets The DeleteAllSockets service deletes all currently created socket instances. For TCP, the DeleteAllSockets service also closes all connections prior to deleting the instances.
  • Page 510: Possible Error Codes For Socket Services

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Configure the MSG with these values: CIP Generic Msg Parameter Description Channel 1 (Integral) Communication Command CIP Generic Service Custom Service Code 51 (hexadecimal) Class 342 (hexadecimal) Instance Attribute Data Table Address (Send) Not used.

  • Page 511
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging The values of the extended error code are as the following. Value Error Code Description (Hex) NO_SOCKET No socket available with the same instance. NO_BUFFER_AVAILABLE No Ethernet buffer available. MAX_CONNECTION Reached to maximum connections.
  • Page 512
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Socket Interface Using CIP Generic Messaging Value Error Code Description (Hex) SOCKET_ERROR_DELETE Socket error during Delete operation. Reserved OPEN_CONN_TIMEOUT Open connection operation timer was expired. ACCEPT_CONN_TIMEOUT Accept connection operation timer was expired. READ_TIMEOUT Read operation timer was expired. WRITE_TIMEOUT Write operation timer was expired.
  • Page 513: Chapter 24 Rcp — Recipe

    Instruction Type: output Execution Time for the RCP Instruction Controller Operation When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 Load 14.5910 µs 0.5205 µs Store 14.8690 µs 0.4515 µs The RCP file allows you to save custom lists of data associated with a recipe.

  • Page 514
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging The RCP instruction uses the following parameters: • Recipe File Number — this is the file number that identifies the custom list of addresses associated with a recipe. • Recipe Number — specifies the number of the recipe to use. If the recipe number is invalid, a user fault (code 0042) is generated.
  • Page 515
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Recipe File and Programming Example Configuring the RCP file 1. Using RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro, locate and select RCP Configuration Files. Right-click and select New. 2. Create a RCP File. • File — This is the number identifying the RCP file. It is the Recipe File Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program and identifies the recipe database.
  • Page 516
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging • Description — This is the file description (optional). • Location where recipe data is stored (applies to all recipe files) — This allows you to designate a memory location for your RCP files. •…
  • Page 517
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging The Recipes are now configured. 8. Create the following ladder logic. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 518
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Application Explanation of Operation When B3:0/0 is energized and B3:0/1 and B3:0/2 are de-energized, Recipe File 0:Recipe number 0 is executed loading the following values to create Yellow paint. • N7:0 = 500 •…
  • Page 519
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Calculation of Consumed Memory The consumed memory in this example can be calculated by the following equation. Data Field Memory Consumption N7:0 2-byte N7:1 2-byte N7:2 2-byte T4:0.PRE 2-byte Integrity Check 2-byte Total 10-byte Consumed memory size for Recipe File 0…
  • Page 520: Data Logging

    • Retrieving (Reading) Records on page 528 Queues and Records The MicroLogix 1400 processor has 128K bytes (128 x 1024) of additional memory for data logging purposes. Within this memory, you can define up to 256 (0…255) data logging queues. Each queue is configurable by size (maximum number of records stored), and by length (each record is 1…109 characters).

  • Page 521
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Example Queue 0 This queue is used to show how to calculate the string length of each record and maximum number of records. Queue 0 (Date = , Time = , Delimiter = ,) Date Time N7:11…
  • Page 522
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Number of Records Using Queue 0 as an example, each record consumes: Record Field Memory Consumption Date 2 bytes Time 2 bytes N7:11 2 bytes L14:0 4 bytes T4:5.ACC 2 bytes I1:3.0 2 bytes B3:2 2 bytes…
  • Page 523
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters string 84 bytes 89 characters…
  • Page 524
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Example Maximum record of String data String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 109 characters. The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length.
  • Page 525: Configuring Data Log Queues

    V8.10.00 or later. Queues 1. Open a MicroLogix 1400 application. The first step in using Data Logging is to configure the data log queue(s). Access to this function is provided via the RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro Project tree:…

  • Page 526: Publication 1766-Rm001A-En-P — October

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Enter the following information: Table 24.1 Data Log Queue Description Configuration Parameter Number of Records Defines the number of records (data sets) in the queue. Separator Character Choose the character to act as the separator for the data in this queue (tab, comma, or space).

  • Page 527: Micrologix 1400 Memory

    Controller When Rung Is: Data Log True False queue number MicroLogix 1400 8.9910 µs 2.6050 µs You must configure a data log queue before programming a DLG instruction IMPORTANT into your ladder program. The DLG instruction triggers the saving of a record. The DLG instruction has one operand: Queue Number — Specifies which data log queue captures a record.

  • Page 528: Data Log Status File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Data Log Status File There is a Data Log Status (DLS) file element for each Data Log Queue. The DLS file does not exist until a data log queue has been configured. The Data Log Status file has 3-word elements.

  • Page 529
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Data Logging Overflow (OV) The Data Logging Overflow (OV) bit is used to indicate when a record gets overwritten in the associated queue. This bit is set (1) by the DLG instruction when a record is overwritten. Once set, the OV bit remains set until you clear (0) it.
  • Page 530: Retrieving (Reading) Records

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Table 24.2 Instruction Type Operand Compare Source A Source B Low Limit (LIM instruction) Test (LIM instruction) High Limit (LIM instruction) Source (MEQ instruction) Mask (MEQ instruction) Compare (MEQ instruction) Math Source A Source B Input (SCP instruction) Logical…

  • Page 531: Accessing The Retrieval File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging For easy use with Microsoft Excel, use the TAB character as the separator NOTE character. Accessing the Retrieval You can use a dedicated retrieval tool or create your own application. File Retrieval Tools There are a number of retrieval tools designed for use with Palm OS, Windows CE, Windows 9x, and Windows NT.

  • Page 532
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Information for Creating Your Own Application Controller Receives Communications Packet Command Structure CMD 0f FNC A2 Byte Size File No. File Tpe Ele. No. S/Ele. No. Table 4: Field Function Description Destination Node Source Node Command Code Status Code…
  • Page 533
    If the data integrity check fails, the record is deleted and an error is sent with STS of 0xF0 and ext STS of 0x0E. For more information on writing a DF1 protocol, refer to Allen-Bradley publication 1770-6.5.16, DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual (available from http://www.literature.rockwellautomation.com).
  • Page 534: Conditions That Will Erase The Data Retrieval File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Recipe and Data Logging Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 535: Chapter 25 Lcd Overview

    This chapter describes how to use the LCD functions. LCD Overview Through the embedded LCD, your MicroLogix 1400 lets you monitor bit, integer and long integer data within the controller, and optionally modify that data, to interact with your control program. Similarly to the optional…

  • Page 536: Lcd Function File

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information The second mode of operation again allows for output from the ladder logic to the display, but adds input from the operator back to the controller (hereafter called “Display With Input mode”). Up to two lines of up to 12 characters each can still be sent to the LCD for display, but the third line, in this mode, is used to obtain numeric input from the user.

  • Page 537: Lcd Function File Sub-Elements Summary

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information The LCD Function File contains status information and control configurations for LCD, Trimpot, and keypad, such as: • Information about whether to use a customized display at power-up • Keypad key-in mode and timeout settings •…

  • Page 538: Lcd Function File Sub-Elements

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information LCD Function File Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access TMAX — Trimpot high value LCD:0.TMAX word (INT) control read-only POT0 — Trimpot 0 Data (TMIN – TMAX) LCD:0.POT0 word (INT) status read-only POT1 — Trimpot 1 Data (TMIN –…

  • Page 539
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information program. By setting this bit to ON (1), you can let your controller display LCD instructions or get keypad inputs from the user at power-up, without additional operations. Data Input Timeout of LCD instruction (TO) Feature Address Data Format…
  • Page 540
    (1) ERR bit. This means a Trimpot range error has occurred at program download. For more information about Trimpot functionality, refer to Using Trim Pots described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User Manual, publication 1766-UM001. LCD Module Operation Error Number (ERN)
  • Page 541
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information F» message. For more information, refer to Using Trim Pots described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User Manual, publication 1766-UM001. Jog data update Mode set (JOG) Feature Address Data Format Type…
  • Page 542
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information after downloading program. You can check the ERR and ERN to see if the POT value is modified or not. The POT0 operation described above is identical to POT1. Instruction Display Window (WND) Feature Address Data Format…
  • Page 543
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information ESC is set when ESC key is pressed. This bit should be cleared so as to get the next key input. Because once ESC key is pressed, this bit is set and latched until it is cleared by manually.
  • Page 544: Lcd — Lcd Instruction

    Instruction Type: output Execution Time for the LCD Instruction Controller When Rung Is: True False MicroLogix 1400 2.1233 µs 0.2191 µs The LCD instruction is used to display string or number, get value with keypad. display area on the LCD…

  • Page 545
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information Default Values: • L2 Source A, L2 Source B, L3 Source A, L3 Source B, L4 Source A, L4 Source B: 0 (Zero means Address not assigned.) • Display With Input: 0 (Zero means Display Only mode.) On a true rung status, the LCD instruction operation depends on how to set the Display With Input operand value.
  • Page 546
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive LCD — LCD Information Displaying Special Characters With the LCD instruction, the LCD screen can display the characters of A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, and special characters in the range of ASCII 0x00…0x7F.
  • Page 547: Programming Instructions Memory Usage And Execution Time

    Appendix MicroLogix 1400 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1400 programming instructions. The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each instruction. Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided.

  • Page 548
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive MicroLogix 1400 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1400 Controllers — Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in µs Memory Execution Time in µs…
  • Page 549
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive MicroLogix 1400 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1400 Controllers — Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in µs Memory Execution Time in µs…
  • Page 550
    None MicroLogix 1400 Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the MicroLogix 1400 processor. The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address. For the address forms in the following table, you can interchange the following file types: •…
  • Page 551
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive MicroLogix 1400 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time • Bit (B), Integer (N) • Timer (T), Counter (C), and Control (R) • String(ST) Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 552: Scan Time Calculation

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive MicroLogix 1400 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1400 The following is an example of how to calculate a typical scan time for a ladder program. In this example, a program scan time of 15.0 ms is Scan Time Calculation assumed.

  • Page 553
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Appendix System Status File The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work. This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information.
  • Page 554: Appendix B Status File Overview

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Status File Overview The status file (S:) contains the following words: Address Function Page Arithmetic Flags Controller Mode STI Mode S:2/9 Memory Module Program Compare S:2/15 Math Overflow Selection S:3H Watchdog Scan Time Free Running Clock Minor Error Bits Major Error Code…

  • Page 555: Status File Details

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Status File Details Arithmetic Flags The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math, logical, or move instruction. The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math, logical, or move instruction in the program is executed.

  • Page 556
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Sign Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:0/3 binary 0 or 1 status read/write This bit is set (1) when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative. Otherwise the bit remains cleared (0). When a STI, High-Speed Counter, Event Interrupt, or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of S:0/3 is restored when execution resumes.
  • Page 557
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Forces Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:1/5 binary status read only This bit is always set (1) by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled. Forces Installed Address Data Format Range Type…
  • Page 558
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Fault Override At Power-Up Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:1/8 binary 0 or 1 control read only When set (1), causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit (S:1/ 13) at power-up.
  • Page 559
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power-Up Mode Behavior Selection bit (S:1/12). See also:LE — Load on Error on page 62. Load Memory Module Always Address Data Format…
  • Page 560
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File The following table shows the Power-Up Mode under various conditions Table 6: MicroLogix 1400 — Major Error Power-Up Mode at Last Power-Down Power-Up Mode Mode Switch Position Halted Mode Behavior at Power-Up Program False Don’t Care…
  • Page 561
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File If you clear the Major Error Halted bit (S:1/13) when the controller mode ATTENTION switch is in the RUN position, the controller immediately enters the RUN mode. Future Access (OEM Lock) Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access…
  • Page 562
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File STI Enabled Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:2/1 binary 0 or 1 control read/write (1) This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 563
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Math Overflow Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:2/14 binary 0 or 1 control read/write Set (1) this bit when you intend to use 32-bit addition and subtraction. When S:2/14 is set, and the result of an ADD, SUB, MUL, or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address (underflow or overflow), •…
  • Page 564
    Free Running Clock depends upon which controller you are using. • SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000: 10 ms/bit (0.010 seconds/bit) • MicroLogix 1100, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1400 and MicroLogix 1500: 100 µs/bit (0.0001 seconds/bit) The following table illustrates the differences.
  • Page 565
    1.28 seconds and off for 1.28 seconds for a total cycle time of 2.56 seconds. If bit S:4/7 is monitored in a MicroLogix 1400, then that bit will be on for 0.0128 seconds and off for 0.0128 seconds for a total cycle time of 0.0256 seconds.
  • Page 566
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Memory Module Boot Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:5/8 binary 0 or 1 status read/write When this bit is set (1) by the controller, it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to S:1/10 (Load Memory Module on Error or Default Program) or S:1/11 (Load Memory Module Always) being set in an attached memory module user program.
  • Page 567
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Install a replacement battery immediately. See your hardware manual for IMPORTANT more information. See also: RTC Battery Operation on page 58. Input Filter Selection Modified Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:5/13 binary 0 or 1…
  • Page 568
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Suspend Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access word -32,768…+32,767 status read/write When the controller executes an Suspend (SUS) instruction, the SUS code is written to this location, S:7. This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode.
  • Page 569
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Active Nodes (Nodes 16 to 31) Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:10 word 0…FFFF status read only (1) This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 570
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Baud Rate Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:15 (high byte) byte 0…255 status read only (1) This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 571
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File STI Set Point Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:30 word 0…65535 status read only (1) This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 572
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Outgoing Message Command Pending Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:33/2 binary 0 or 1 status read only (1) This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 573
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Data File Overwrite Protection Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:36/10 binary 0 or 1 status read/write When clear (0), this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller, protected data files in the controller were not overwritten, or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded.
  • Page 574
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File RTC Day of Month Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:39 word 1…31 status read only (1) This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 575
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File RTC Seconds Data Format Range Type User Program Access Address S:42 word 0…59 status read only (1) This word can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).
  • Page 576
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File OS Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:58 ASCII A…Z status read only This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller. OS FRN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access…
  • Page 577
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File User Program Functionality Type Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S:63 word 0…32,767 status read only This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller. Compiler Revision — Build Number Address Data Format Range…
  • Page 578
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive System Status File Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 579: Identifying Controller Faults

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Appendix Fault Messages and Error Codes This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller. Topics include: • identifying controller faults • contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance Identifying Controller While a program is executing, a fault may occur within the operating system or your program.

  • Page 580
    Routine on page 310 for information on creating a user fault subroutine. Fault Messages This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller. Each table lists the error code description, the probable cause, and the recommended corrective action.
  • Page 581
    The base hardware faulted or is Non-User FAULT incompatible with the OS. • Replace the Controller (MicroLogix 1100, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1400). • Replace the Base Unit (MicroLogix 1500 only). • Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller.
  • Page 582
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification (Hex) 0015 I/O CONFIGURATION The user program I/O configuration Non-User Re-compile and reload the program, and enter FILE ERROR is invalid. the Run mode.
  • Page 583
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification (Hex) 0029 INSTRUCTION An indirect address reference in the Recoverable Correct the program to ensure that there are INDIRECTION ladder program is outside of the no indirect references outside data file space.
  • Page 584
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification (Hex) 003E INVALID BIT SHIFT OR A BSR or BSL instruction length Recoverable Correct the user program or allocate more LIFO/FIFO parameter is greater than 2048 or an data file space using the memory map, then…
  • Page 585
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification (Hex) • Check connections. EXPANSION I/O The controller cannot communicate Non-User xx81 HARDWARE ERROR with an expansion I/O module. • Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used.
  • Page 586
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification (Hex) • Either an expansion I/O cable is • Correct the user program to eliminate a (1)(2) EXPANSION I/O Non-User xx8A CABLE configured in the user program,…
  • Page 587: Contacting Rockwell Automation For Assistance

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Contacting Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance, it is helpful to obtain the following information ready: Automation for Assistance • controller type, series letter, and revision letter of the base unit •…

  • Page 588
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Fault Messages and Error Codes Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 589
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Appendix Protocol Configuration Use the information in this appendix for configuring communication protocols. The following protocols are supported from any RS-232 communication channel: • DH-485 • DF1 Full-Duplex • DF1 Half-Duplex • DF1 Radio Modem • Modbus RTU •…
  • Page 590: Communication Protocol

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DH-485 Communication The information in this section describes the DH-485 network functions, network architecture, and performance characteristics. It also helps you Protocol plan and operate the controller on a DH-485 network. DH-485 Network Description The DH-485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires.

  • Page 591
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DH-485 Broadcast Messages A broadcast write command is sent as a DH-485 Send Data No Acknowledgement (SDN) packet. No acknowledgement or reply is returned. DH-485 Configuration Parameters When communications are configured for DH-485, the following parameters can be changed: Parameter Options…
  • Page 592
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second programming terminal that is not being used) slow the data transfer rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32.
  • Page 593
    All devices should be set to the same maximum node address. IMPORTANT MicroLogix 1400 Remote Packet Support These controllers can respond and initiate with device’s communications (or commands) that do not originate on the local DH-485 network. This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH-485 and DH+ networks.
  • Page 594: Df1 Full-Duplex Protocol

    RS-232 connection to external devices, such as computers, or other controllers that support DF1 Full-Duplex. DF1 is an open protocol. Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual, Allen-Bradley publication 1770-6.5.16, for more information. DF1 Full-Duplex Operation DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) is useful where RS-232 point-to-point communication is required.

  • Page 595: Df1 Half-Duplex Protocol

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DF1 Half-Duplex DF1 Half-Duplex protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple slave network. In contrast to the DF1 Full-Duplex protocol, Protocol communication takes place in one direction at a time. You can use the RS-232 port on the MicroLogix controller as both a Half-Duplex programming port, and a Half-Duplex peer-to-peer messaging port.

  • Page 596
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Message-Based Polling Mode Message-based polling mode is best used in networks when communication with the slave stations is not time critical and where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station communicates with each slave station.
  • Page 597
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Standard polling mode causes the master station to continuously send one or more 4-byte poll packets to each slave station address configured by the user in the poll list(s) in round robin fashion – as soon as the end of the polling list is reached, the master station immediately goes back and starts polling slave stations from the top of the polling list over again.
  • Page 598
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration stations to an operator interface connected to the master station for monitoring, alarming and logging purposes, and to precondition MSG instructions to each particular slave. This second use is based on the supposition that if a slave station did not respond the last time it was polled, it may not be able to receive and respond to a MSG instruction now, and so it would most likely process the maximum number of retries and time-outs before completing in error.
  • Page 599
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Addressing Tips Each station on the network, including the master station, must have a unique address. The address range is 0…254, so you can have a maximum of 255 stations on a single telemetry network. Station address 255 is the broadcast address, which you cannot select as a station’s individual address.
  • Page 600
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Standard Mode Channel Configuration DF1 Half-Duplex Master MSG-based Polling Mode Operation With MSG-based Polling Mode, the master device only initiates communication with a slave when a MSG instruction to that slave is triggered in ladder logic. Once the read or write command has been transmitted, the master waits the Reply MSG Timeout period and then polls that slave for a reply to its command.
  • Page 601
    When the system driver is DF1 Half-Duplex Master, the following parameters can be changed: DF1 Half-Duplex Master Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1400: Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K 19.2K Parity none, even none Node Address 0…254 decimal (255 is reserved for broadcast)
  • Page 602
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DF1 Half-Duplex Master Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default RTS Send Delay 0…65535 (can be set in 20 ms increments) – only with control line set to “Half Duplex Modem (x20 ms) (RTS/CTS Handshaking)” Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response.
  • Page 603
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DF1 Half-Duplex Master Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File. Viewing Channel Status Data for DF1 Half-Duplex Master Double-click the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen.
  • Page 604
    DF1 Half-Duplex Master Active Node Table. The table is stored in the Communications Status Function File, words CSx:27…CSx:42, where x is the channel number (x = 0 for MicroLogix 1400). Each bit in the table represents a station on the link, from 0…254, starting with CSx:27/0 for address 0 and CSx:42/14 for address 254.
  • Page 605
    When the system driver is DF1 Half-Duplex Slave, the following parameters can be changed: DF1 Half-Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1400: Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K 19.2K Parity none, even none Node Address 0…254 decimal (255 is reserved for broadcast)
  • Page 606: Df1 Radio Modem Protocol

    DF1 Radio Modem protocol. DF1 Radio Modem protocol is currently supported by SLC 5/03, 5/04 and 5/05 controllers; MicroLogix 1400, 1200 and 1500 controllers; and Logix controllers at Version 16.1 firmware or higher. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…

  • Page 607
    Channel 0 in MicroLogix 1400. Channel configuration appears as follows. Figure shows Channel 0 configuration. DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration (MicroLogix 1400) When the system driver is DF1 Radio Modem, the following parameters can be changed for Channel 0.
  • Page 608
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 Driver DF1 Radio Modem Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K 19.2K Parity none, even none Node Address 0…254 decimal (255 is reserved for broadcast) Store and Forward…
  • Page 609
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration user-configured Store & Forward Table to indicate which received packets it should re-broadcast, based on the packet’s source and destination addresses. Configuring the Store & Forward Table The Store & Forward Table can be configured to use any valid binary data table file (B3, B9…B255) of length 16 words.
  • Page 610
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Applying DF1 Radio Modem Protocol Note 1 – The link layer of Node 1 blocks the re-transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte equal to the receiving node’s station address. Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re-transmitted. Note 2 –…
  • Page 611
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File. Viewing Channel Status for DF1 Radio Modem Double-click the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen.
  • Page 612
    DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro version 5.50 or higher. All MicroLogix 1400 controllers support DF1 Radio Modem protocol. RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro version 7.0 or higher is required to configure the MicroLogix 1400.
  • Page 613: Modbus Rtu Protocol

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration 4. Can I take advantage of the SLC 5/03, 5/04 and 5/05 channel-to-channel passthru to remotely program the other SLC and MicroLogix nodes using RSLinx and RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro running on a PC connected to a local SLC processor via DH+ or Ethernet? Yes, with certain limitations imposed based on the radio modem network.

  • Page 614
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix, and does not get entered into the Modbus Data Address field when configuring the message instruction. When the message is sent, the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4-character hex number to be transmitted via the network (with a range of 0-FFFFh);…
  • Page 615
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration The Baud defaults to 19200. The Control Line can be configured as: • No Handshaking • Full-Duplex Modem (RTS on) • Half-Duplex Modem (RTS/CTS handshaking). • No Handshaking (485 Network) In order to connect directly to an RS-485 Modbus network, use a NOTE 1763-NC01 cable and configure the Control Line setting for No Handshaking (485 network).
  • Page 616
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Master Communications Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 Driver Modbus RTU Master Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K 19.2K Parity none, even, odd none Control Line No Handshaking, Full-Duplex Modem (RTS on), Half-Duplex Modem (RTS/CTS handshaking), No Handshaking…
  • Page 617
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Slave Configuration The Modbus configuration screen and configuration procedure are shown below: 1. To set up Channel 0 and data files for Modbus communication, select the Channel 0 Configuration tab. 2. Choose “Modbus RTU Slave” driver and assign driver characteristics. 3.
  • Page 618
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration When the system driver is Modbus RTU Slave, the following communication port parameters can be changed: Modbus RTU Slave Communications Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 Driver Modbus RTU Slave Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K 19.2K…
  • Page 619
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave Memory Map The modbus Memory map is summarized in and detailed in : Modbus to MicroLogix Memory Map — Summary Modbus Description Valid MicroLogix Addressing Addressing File Type Data File Number Address 0001…4096 Read/Write Modbus Coil Data space Bit (B) or Integer (N)
  • Page 620
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map — Detail Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code (decimal) 0001…4096 Read/Write Modbus Coil Data space 1, 5, 15 10001…14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space 30001…30256 Read Modbus Input Register space 30501 Modbus Data Table Coil File Number…
  • Page 621
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map — Detail Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code (decimal) 40257…40512 Read/Write Modbus Holding Register space (2nd Holding Register file). 3, 6, 16 40513…40768 Read/Write Modbus Holding Register space (3rd Holding Register file). 3, 6, 16 40769…41024 Read/Write Modbus Holding Register space (4th Holding Register file).
  • Page 622
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Master Command Function Code Subfunction Code (decimal) (decimal) Read Input Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Holding Register Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Holding Registers (1) Broadcast is supported for this command. Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 623
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus Error Codes Upon receiving a Modbus command that is not supported or improperly formatted, the controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave will respond with one of the exception codes listed in below: Modbus Error Codes Returned by Modbus RTU Slave Error Error Description…
  • Page 624
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction Error Error Description Received Code Exception Code Negative Acknowledge The slave cannot perform the program function received in the command. Memory Parity Error The slave attempted to read extended memory, but detected a parity error in the memory.
  • Page 625: Ascii Driver

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration ASCII Driver The ASCII driver provides connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent devices. You can use ASCII by configuring the RS-232 port, channel 0 for ASCII driver.

  • Page 626
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration When the driver is set to ASCII, the following parameters can be changed: ASCII Channel Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Programming Software Default Channel Channel 0 Driver ASCII Baud Rate Toggles between the communication rate of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, and 38.4K. 1200 Parity Toggles between None, Odd, and Even.
  • Page 627: Ethernet Driver

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration ASCII Channel Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Programming Software Default RTS Send Allows you to select the delay between when RTS is raised and the transmission is initiated. Specify Delay (x20 the RTS Send Delay value in increments of 20 ms. Valid range is 0…65535. Stop Bits 1,5,2 Data Bits…

  • Page 628
    Name Server System (DNS) server. Network Link 0…199. The Link ID assigned to the MicroLogix 1400 either by an RSLinx OPC topic or by the routing table in a 1756-DHRIO or 1756-DH485 module. Bootp Enable enabled, disabled 1 (enabled) Check this box to enable Bootp. If enabled, this causes the processor at power up to try to obtain its network-related parameters (IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, etc.) via BOOTP request.
  • Page 629
    Once changed, the function will be operational in the processor after the system is restarted. SMTP Client The SMTP Client service enable switch. When SMTP is enabled, MicroLogix 1400 is capable of 0 (disabled) Enable transmitting e-mail messages generated by a 485CIF write message with a string element.
  • Page 630
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Protocol Configuration Ethernet Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Port Setting Auto Negotiate is enabled 10/100Mbps Full Duplex/Half 10/100Mbps Full Duplex/Half Duplex, Duplex 100 Mbps Full or 100 Mbps Half Duplex, 100 Mbps Full Duplex or 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half Duplex or 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half Duplex,…
  • Page 631: Knowledgebase Quick Starts # 17444 «Quick Start» Pulse Train Output (Ptox)

    • # 18498 “Quick Start” Data Logging (DLG) on page 650 # 17444 “Quick Start” NOTE: The PTO and PWM functions are only available when using the BXB or BXBA models of the MicroLogix 1400 Pulse Train Output (PTOX) Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro v8.10.00 or later and select the PTOX tab, then select the [+] next to…

  • Page 632
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Enter the following parameters as the “Minimum Configuration” required for the PTO to generate pulses. PTOX:0.OUT Select Destination Output for pulses: Output O:0/2, O:0/ 3 or O:0/4 PTOX:0.OF Output Frequency — Frequency of pulses: 0…100,000 Hz Data less then zero and greater then 100,000 generates a PTOX error PTOX:0.TOP…
  • Page 633
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File #2 By toggling Bit B3/0 the PTO can be activated. Once running the PTO will generate the number of pulses entered into the PTOX:0.TOP long word and then stop.
  • Page 634: 17446 «Quick Start» Pulse Width Modulation (Pwmx)

    Knowledgebase Quick Starts # 17446 “Quick Start” NOTE: The PTO and PWM functions are only available when using the BXB or BXBA models of the MicroLogix 1400. Pulse Width Modulation (PWMX) Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro v8.10.00 or later and select the PWMX tab, then select the [+] next to…

  • Page 635
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Example The following example will generate a waveform on Output O:0/2 at a frequency of 250Hz and a 50% Duty Cycle. The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File #2 By toggling Bit B3/0 the PWM can be activated.
  • Page 636: 17447 «Quick Start» High Speed Counter (Hsc)

    Refer to HSC Mode (MOD) on page 116. Input device connection depends on the counter mode selected. The MicroLogix 1400 uses a 32-bit signed integer for the HSC this allows for a count range of (+/-) 2,147,483,647.

  • Page 637
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts HSC:0/AS Auto-Start defines if the HSC function will automatically start when the MicroLogix enters run or test. HSC:0/CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the HSC HSC:0.HIP High Preset is the upper set point (in counts) that defines when the HSC will generate an interrupt and execute the PFN sub-routine.
  • Page 638
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Proper wiring of a single ended encoder (Typical Allen-Bradley 845TK) when configuring HSC.MOD for Mode 6 (Quadrature Counter) The following diagram illustrates connecting an encoder to the MicroLogix 1400. The minimum configuration required for Mode 6 operation is to enter a file number for the PFN parameter, set the AS and CE bits to a (1) and enter a (6) for the MOD parameter.
  • Page 639
    Solution:The input filter frequency may need to be adjusted in order to capture the input pulses. Follow the steps below. 1. Select “I/O Configuration” 2. Highlight the “MicroLogix 1400“ 3. Select “Adv Config“ 4. Select the “Embedded I/O Configuration” Tab 5. Adjust Input filters as needed Problem #2: The HSC instruction does not accumulate counts and the Error Code (ER) shows a value of (1).
  • Page 640: 17465 «Quick Start» Message (Msg)

    Only the HSC will have control over these outputs. # 17465 “Quick Start” Communications Specifications: Message (MSG) The MicroLogix 1400 processors contain a total of (12) Message Buffers. (8) Incoming Any incoming MSG’s, Communications, and/or responses to a command the ML1400 initiated. (4) Outgoing Any outgoing MSG’s, Communications and/or responses to incoming request for data.

  • Page 641
    The MSG instruction in the MicroLogix 1400 controller uses a Data File MG to process the message instruction. All message elements are accessed using the MG prefix (example: MSG done bit = MG11:0/DN).
  • Page 642
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts MicroLogix 1400 (Node 1) Ladder Logic MSG Setup Screen Micrologix 1000 (Node 4) Ladder Logic No ladder logic is required in the destination processor, however the communications channel must be configured to match the source processor.
  • Page 643
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Micrologix 1000 Channel Configuration Important Note:Do not connect to ML1000 directly using a 1761-CBL-AM00 cable. Important Note:After the ladder logic has been entered into the ML1400 and the ML1000 channel configuration has been changed, in order for this example to function connect the controllers using a 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, leave connected until the COMM 0 LED on the ML1400 starts to blink.
  • Page 644: 17501 «Quick Start» Selectable Timed Interrupt (Sti)

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Note:This example was written using a ML1400 communicating to a ML1000, however any DF1 or DH485 device could have been substituted for the ML1000. (i.e. MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix1500, SLC 5/03, 5/04, 5/ 05, PLC-5, Bar Code Scanners, etc.) # 17501 “Quick Start”…

  • Page 645
    (3…255). STI:0/AS Auto-Start defines if the STI function will automatically start when the MicroLogix 1400 enters run or test. STI:0/UIE User Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the STI subroutine from processing.
  • Page 646: 17503 «Quick Start» Real Time Clock (Rtc)

    The RTC provides Year, Month, Day, Day of Month, Day of Week, Hour, Minute, and Second information to the RTC Function file in the controller. The MicroLogix 1400 has a built-in real time clock. Getting Started: Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro v8.10.00 or later and select the RTC tab (See Below)

  • Page 647
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Values can be entered for the Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, and Seconds offline, once downloaded the values will take effect immediately. Note: The Day of the week is calculated by the RTC Online Pressing will set the ML1400 clock to the same Date &…
  • Page 648: 17558 «Quick Start» User Interrupt Disable (Uid)

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts # 17558 “Quick Start” The UID instruction can be used as an output instruction to disable selected user interrupts. User Interrupt Disable (UID) Once a user interrupt is disabled the User Interrupt Enable bit (UIE) for the selected interrupt will be cleared or reset to a zero (0).

  • Page 649: 18465 «Quick Start» Rtc Synchronization Between Controllers

    The User Interrupt Enable bit (UIE) determines if the interrupt executes or not. # 18465 “Quick Start” The following example illustrates a message write from an SLC 5/03 or higher processor to a Micrologix 1400 processor with RTC that has been RTC Synchronization enabled. Between Controllers This example can also be applied for messaging between MicroLogix 1100, 1200, 1400, and 1500 controllers.

  • Page 650
    +24vdc TERM SHLD CHS GND DC SOURCE CABLE EXTERNAL 1747-CP3 Additional MicroLogix 1200/1500s MicroLogix 1400 TERM SHLD CHS GND DC SOURCE CABLE EXTERNAL 44616 1. Configure the SLC’s Channel 0 port for DH-485 protocol. 2. Enter the following ladder logic into the SLC processor.
  • Page 651
    Knowledgebase Quick Starts The example above messages the SLC 500 Date and Time data (S:37 — S:42)to the MicroLogix 1400 RTC, each time the SLC processor is powered up and placed into the RUN mode or each time the Time Synchronization Bit (B3:0/0) is enabled.
  • Page 652: 18498 «Quick Start» Data Logging (Dlg)

    Each record is stored in a user-configured battery backed queue. The size of the queue is 128K bytes, independent of the rest of the processor memory. Configuring the DLG instruction in the MicroLogix 1400 1. Create a new RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro project for the MicroLogix 1400 2.

  • Page 653
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts FYI — Every time Configuration above is double-clicked a new queue is added. To delete queues, simply select the queue with the mouse and press the <delete> key on the keyboard. 4. Double-Click on Data Log configuration to open the Configuration window.
  • Page 654
    7. Click OK and accept the Data Log Queue window 8. Once the N10 file has been created enter the following values for each 9. Download the program to your MicroLogix 1400. 10. Go On-Line 11. Toggle the Data Logging Enable(B3:0/0) bit Off to On a total of 5 times.
  • Page 655
    ATTENTION computers communication port or if the wrong COM port is selected or a processor other then the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to the computer you will not be able to continue. The Data Logging utility is the only supported method for retrieving data, that has been stored in the processor.
  • Page 656
    5. Click Read Status once a valid connection is established The DLOG utility will now retrieve the status information from the MicroLogix 1400 controller. In this example you can see that Queue #0 has 100 records allocated and 5 recorded.
  • Page 657
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts FYI — Remember that once the data records have been read from the MicroLogix the queue is automatically cleared. 7. Click Save Data. 8. Enter a file name. In our example “My_DLG_Data” was used. Make note of the filename about to be created and the directory it is being saved to for later reference.
  • Page 658
    Q1: Can I write my own software application to retrieve the data stored in the Data Logging queue? A1: Yes — In the MicroLogix 1400 Instruction Set Reference manual, under the Data Logging chapter, all the information necessary to create your own software application, for retrieving the data stored in the processors Data Logging queue, is shown.
  • Page 659
    Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following outlines the configuration and steps that can be used to read data log records from an MicroLogix 1400 controller remotely via a 1747CH0RAD (Remote Access Modem Kit) This example assumes that the programmer has configured the DLG instruction in the ML1400 to log data and that HyperTerminal is installed, configured and the user is familiar with its use.
  • Page 660
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts DISCONNECTING MODEM 1. 1. Ensure the DLG Utility has been shutdown. 2. 2.Start HyperTerminal (Do not re-connect) 3. 3.Open the previously configured “Datalog “ 4. Type “+++” to place modem in command mode, Do not press the ENTER KEY! Your modem will respond: OK 5.
  • Page 661
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 662
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 663: Appendix 26 Binary Numbers

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Appendix Number Systems This appendix: • covers binary and hexadecimal numbers. • explains the use of a hex mask to filter data in certain programming instructions. Binary Numbers The processor memory stores 16-bit binary numbers. As indicated in the following figure, each position in the number has a decimal value, beginning at the right with 2 and ending at the left with 2…

  • Page 664
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Number Systems = 16384 = 8192 = 4096 = 2048 = 1024 = 512 = 256 = 128 = 64 = 32 = 16 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32767 = 0 This position is always zero for positive numbers.
  • Page 665: Hexadecimal Numbers

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Number Systems = 16384 = 8192 = 4096 = 2048 = 1024 = 512 = 256 = 128 = 64 = 32 = 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32767 = 32768 This position is always 1 for negative numbers.

  • Page 666
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Number Systems 2×16 = 8192 1×16 = 256 8×16 = 128 10×16 = 10 2 1 8 A 8586 Hexadecimal and binary numbers have the following equivalence. Hexadecimal 2 1 8 A = 8586 Binary 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0…
  • Page 667: Hex Mask

    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Number Systems Hex Mask This is a 4-character code, entered as a parameter in SQO, SQC, and other instructions to exclude selected bits of a word from being operated on by the instruction. The hexadecimal values are used in their binary equivalent form, as indicated in the figure below.

  • Page 668
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Number Systems Notes: Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 669: Glossary

    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, publication AG-7.1, for a complete guide to Allen-Bradley technical terms. address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For example, I:1/0 is the memory address for data located in Input file word 1, bit 0.

  • Page 670
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary communication scan A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with devices (such as other controllers and operator interface devices) takes place during this period. control program User logic (the application) that defines the controller’s operation. controller A device, such as a programmable controller, used to control output devices.
  • Page 671
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary Data Terminal Equipment Electromagnetic interference. embedded I/O Embedded I/O is the controller’s on-board I/O. For MicroLogix controllers, embedded I/O is all I/O residing at slot 0. expansion I/O Expansion I/O is I/O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable. MicroLogix 1100, 1200 and 1400 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I/ O.
  • Page 672
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary full-duplex A mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously (contrast with half-duplex). half-duplex A mode of communication where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time. hard disk A storage device in a personal computer. high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word.
  • Page 673
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary Input and Output jump Changes the normal sequence of program execution. In ladder programs a JUMP (JMP) instruction causes execution to jump to a specific rung in the user program. ladder logic A graphical programming format resembling a ladder-like diagram. The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language.
  • Page 674
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary Modbus RTU Slave A half-duplex serial communication protocol. modem Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line. modes Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program. negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the desired voltage level.
  • Page 675
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary offset A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point. off-state leakage current When a mechanical switch is opened (off-state), no current flows through the switch. Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches, have a small current flow when they are in the off state.
  • Page 676
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary processor A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.) processor files The set of program and data files resident in the controller. program file Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs. MicroLogix controllers support multiple program files. program mode When the controller is not scanning the control program.
  • Page 677
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary reserved bit A location reserved for internal use. retentive data Information (data) that is preserved through power cycles. RS-232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits. run mode An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program.
  • Page 678
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Glossary sourcing A term used to describe current flow between two devices. A sourcing device or circuit provides a power. status The condition of a circuit or system. terminal A point on an I/O module that external devices, such as a push button or pilot light, are wired to.
  • Page 679
    AEX instruction operation AHL instruction battery low status bit AIC instruction baud rate AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter baud rate status Allen-Bradley BHI Function File contacting for assistance allow future access setting bit instructions AND instruction bit shift left instruction application…
  • Page 680
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index DF1 radio modem parameters counter file and status bits DH485 parameters definition Modbus RTU Master parameters how counters work Modbus RTU Slave parameters CPU (central processing unit), definition clear instruction CPW instruction clearing CS function file controller faults CTD instruction controller memory…
  • Page 681
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index DIN rail PTO Quick Start DIV instruction PWM Quick Start divide instruction RTC Quick Start RTC Synchronization Quick Start Quick Start example STI Quick Start DLG Instruction user interrupt disable (UID) Quick Start download exclusive OR instruction DTE, definition executing mode execution time…
  • Page 682
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index free running clock status input and output instructions full-duplex input device function files input filter selection modified status bit base hardware information (BHI) input filtering communications status (CS) file input scan event input interrupt (EII) input/output status file high-speed counter (HSC) inrush current…
  • Page 683
    NOT instruction messaging logical OR instruction remote station-to-remote station low byte messaging overview MicroLogix 1400 scan time example minor error bits MMI function file major error code status mnemonic major error detected in user fault routine status bit Modbus definition…
  • Page 684
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index modem series letter status modes operating voltage monitoring controller operation, fault recovery procedure OR instruction MOV instruction OSF instruction move instructions OSR instruction OTE instruction Quick Start example OTL instruction MSG instruction OTU instruction error codes outgoing message command pending status bit ladder logic output device…
  • Page 685
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index programmable limit switch file disabling programming device function file programming instructions real-time clock proportional integral derivative Quick Start example application notes real-time clock adjust instruction PID instruction recipe PID tuning recipe instruction runtime errors REF instruction the PID concept refresh instruction the PID equation…
  • Page 686
    TOF instruction Station list TON instruction viewing troubleshooting status automatically clearing faults status file contacting Allen-Bradley for assistance identifying controller faults enabled bit manually clearing faults executing bit using the fault routine file number status true function file lost status bit…
  • Page 687
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index UIF instruction upload watchdog scan time user application mode status write user fault routine creating a user fault routine file number status XIC instruction major error detected status bit XIO instruction recoverable and non-recoverable faults XOR instruction user interrupt disable instruction XPY instruction…
  • Page 688
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Index Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008…
  • Page 689
    — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive MicroLogix 1400 List of Instructions and Function Files Instruction List Instruction List Instruction- Description Page Instruction- Description Page LBL — Label ABL — Test Buffer for Line LCD — LCD instruction ABS — Absolute Value LEQ — Less Than or Equal To…
  • Page 690
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Instruction List Instruction- Description Page UIF — User Interrupt Flush XIC — Examine if Closed XIO — Examine if Open XOR — Exclusive OR XPY — X Power Y Function File List Function File- Description Page BHI — Base Hardware Information CS — Communications Status EII — Event Input Interrupt…
  • Page 691
    ___No, there is no need to contact me ___Yes, please call me ___Yes, please email me at _______________________ ___Yes, please contact me via _____________________ Return this form to: Rockwell Automation Technical Communications, 1 Allen-Bradley Dr., Mayfield Hts., OH 44124-9705 Fax: 440-646-3525 Email: RADocumentComments@ra.rockwell.com Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007…
  • Page 692
    PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE) Other Comments PLEASE FOLD HERE NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 18235 CLEVELAND OH POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE 1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DR MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705…
  • Page 693
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive…
  • Page 694
    efesotomasyon.com — Allen Bradley,Rockwell,plc,servo,drive Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At Support http://support.rockwellautomation.com, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.

  1. Обязательно представиться на русском языке кириллицей (заполнить поле «Имя»).
  2. Фиктивные имена мы не приветствуем. Ивановых и Пупкиных здесь уже достаточно.
  3. Не писать свой вопрос в первую попавшуюся тему — вместо этого создать новую тему.
  4. За поиск, предложение и обсуждение пиратского ПО и средств взлома — бан без предупреждения.
  5. Рекламу и частные объявления «куплю/продам/есть халтура» мы не размещаем ни на каких условиях.
  6. Перед тем как что-то написать — читать здесь и здесь.

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Доброго времени суток, уважаемые!
ПЛК MicroLogix 1400 1766-L32bxba подключен к панели Monitouch S806CD. На plc мигал fault, в меню fault code было Major error 0001h. Plc был в Remote, перевел в Program, потом в Run, ошибка исчезла, загорелся Run.Battery Low — не горит. Панель тоже была с ошибкой error 161: SRAM not formatted. В мануале нашел как отформатировать и поменял батарейку (сдохла). Панель ожила, но в связке с плк пишет: plc1 error code received
Received code No: 10 00
Rslinx classic 2.54.00.11 смог подключить по rs-232 и Ethernet. Но RSLogix 500 Pro 7.10.00 и RSLogix Micro Starter Lite 8.30.00 при попытке подключить плк выдают ошибку: The target node is not an SLC-500 or MicroLogix Controller.
Как убедиться что в плк слетела или не слетела программа? Может ли плк не отвечать панели из-за отсутствия модулей расширения?
Есть ещё один такой же станок, но на его панели такая же ошибка, а что с плк пока не знаю. Но до него добираться проблематично. Фото панели, плк и ошибок во вложении. Форумчане выручайте, вторые сутки урывками сплю!

[+]

У вас нет необходимых прав для просмотра вложений в этом сообщении.

Andreyit

освоился
освоился
Сообщения: 298
Зарегистрирован: 06 фев 2020, 16:09
Имя: Андрей
город/регион: Екатеринбург
Поблагодарили: 54 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Andreyit »

Обновляйте rslogix 500 до 11 версии (или выше). Это раз. В документации требуют 8.1 Pro или выше.
«RSLogix Micro Starter Lite 8.30.00» — это вообще две разные версии, еще и «Lite» намекает что урезана она. + у вас в rs linx в названии ПЛК даже приписка есть «11.00», что скорее всего указывает версию rslogix которую надо.
Из официальной документации «Замена батареи при выключенном питании приведет к потере всех данных в памяти. Производите замену батареи при включенном контроллере». Это два.
Вас может спасти если была карточка памяти вставлена. Около COM-порта такой прямоугольник. Но без rslogix точно не сказать и не восстановить если она есть.
Error code received — «The error code denotes a controller error (NAK).
1) When the error code appears only on a certain screen, a memory address that does not exist on the controller may be set on the S8-series screen.
2) When the error code appears at power-on, the memory address set for buffering area or initial macro or in the [Read/Write Area] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting]) may not exist in the controller».
Т.е. панель запрашивает данные из адреса в ПЛК, а этого адреса не существует.

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Спасибо за ответ. Если бы в нашей деревне можно было бы обновить/купить/найти Rslogix 11.00 было бы счастье. Насчёт

Andreyit писал(а): ↑28 июл 2021, 16:33
«RSLogix Micro Starter Lite 8.30.00» — это вообще две разные версии,

позже сделаю скрин. Приписка в Rslinx «11.00» это frn, т.е версия прошивки plc. Батарея была заменена на панели оператора. Карточки памяти не было.

Andreyit

освоился
освоился
Сообщения: 298
Зарегистрирован: 06 фев 2020, 16:09
Имя: Андрей
город/регион: Екатеринбург
Поблагодарили: 54 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Andreyit »

Если лицензия была 8 версии, то обновить не должно быть сложно. А найти… Ну, можно найти 12 версию.
У 5000 серии пошла та же хрень как и у сименса, что какой версией ПО делалась заливка в ПЛК, то только той и сможете выгрузить. А их там куча разных. У 500 точно не скажу, но вот это 11.00 прям намекает…
Но ведь у вас «Battery Low — не горит», если это упомянули значит раньше горел.
И по ошибке «0001h» это NVRAM error — if a power down occurred during program download or transfer from the memory module.
• RAM integrity test failed», но не так подробно как для SCL т.к. у SCL еще есть причина «Loss of battery or capacitor backup» (хотя RAM integrity test failed тоже намекает на это). Т.е. батарейка у ПЛК с большой вероятностью села и программа в ПЛК потеряна. Посмотрите насчет карточки памяти или вам только производитель помочь может.

Аватара пользователя

Looker

эксперт
эксперт
Сообщения: 1081
Зарегистрирован: 09 фев 2011, 11:32
Имя: Дитрих Евгений Линусович
город/регион: Донецк
Благодарил (а): 236 раз
Поблагодарили: 174 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Looker »

Andreyit писал(а): ↑29 июл 2021, 07:14Посмотрите насчет карточки памяти или вам только производитель помочь может.

Когда он сможет подключиться: потеряна программа в ОЗУ и при наличии карточки, ему об этом будет сказано открытым текстом, но по английски.
Биты поведения контроллера при старте по умолчанию не взведены. Обслуживая чужие разработки — 100%, никто на это не обращал внимание. Наверно по этому мне и прилетало обслуживание.

Программа в ПЗУ (карточка) может отличаться от рабочей в ОЗУ (сделали изменения OnLine, а в ПЗУ не вписали, т.к. это требует остановки процесса).

Отправлено спустя 12 минут 14 секунд:

User1981 писал(а): ↑28 июл 2021, 04:08Может ли плк не отвечать панели из-за отсутствия модулей расширения?

Нет. Контролер всегда отвечает панели, но если в контроллере слетела программа и сеть в контроллере была не по умолчанию. Отсутствующие модули можно можно отключить в статусе процессора, но это влияет только на ошибки самого процессора, панель об этом даже не знает.

Отправлено спустя 6 минут 8 секунд:
Про панели AB совет: Тренды не писать на внутреннюю память — убивают ее за 2-3 года.

_______________________________________________
Узкая специализация в широком смысле этого слова ведет к широкой идиотизации в узком смысле этого слова . (С) Бернард Шоу

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

И снова здравствуйте! Нашел RSLogix 500 v8.20, но как и ожидал, она для MicroLogix 1400 ser A, а у меня ser B. Программы в плк не обнаружил. Естественно вопрос: программы не было или Rslogix не тот? В панели проект сидит. На следующей неделе посмотрю второй станок, если и в нем проекта не будет, то неделя бессонных ночей и танцев с бубном коту под хвост!
Что интересно, батарея на ПЛК живая, напряжение 3,073 V. Правда на самом станке сгорел диодный мост kbpc5010, но он питает обмотки реле 24 V. Питание ПЛК от отдельного БП.
Спасибо большое!
P.S. Ищется программа от турецкого настилочного станка Ozbilim P4ADD (Astron).

Аватара пользователя

Looker

эксперт
эксперт
Сообщения: 1081
Зарегистрирован: 09 фев 2011, 11:32
Имя: Дитрих Евгений Линусович
город/регион: Донецк
Благодарил (а): 236 раз
Поблагодарили: 174 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Looker »

User1981 писал(а): ↑31 июл 2021, 02:32Нашел RSLogix 500 v8.20, но как и ожидал, она для MicroLogix 1400 ser A, а у меня ser B.

В версии 8.30 series B уже поддерживается.

User1981 писал(а): ↑31 июл 2021, 02:32Программы в плк не обнаружил.

RSLinx Classic в окне RSWho увидишь свой контроллер и название загруженной программы.
Если RSLinx Classic Gateway, тогда можешь увидеть еще и внутренние данные. Анализ файла S2 может многое рассказать, но рядом нужно иметь букварь для расшифровки.

Последний раз редактировалось Looker 31 июл 2021, 10:23, всего редактировалось 1 раз.

_______________________________________________
Узкая специализация в широком смысле этого слова ведет к широкой идиотизации в узком смысле этого слова . (С) Бернард Шоу

Andreyit

освоился
освоился
Сообщения: 298
Зарегистрирован: 06 фев 2020, 16:09
Имя: Андрей
город/регион: Екатеринбург
Поблагодарили: 54 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Andreyit »

Если у вас села батарейка в панели (которая держит часы реально времени), значит что оборудование где-то долго стояло. А потом кто-то «умный» решил поменять на обесточеном плк батарейку (заметив или нет ошибку на панеле, и что она связана с батарейкой), тип все целое, менялось, программа на месте (вероятно можно увидеть т. к. у оригинальной батарейки название 1747-BA). Результат видим. Повторюсь чаще всего на такое ставилась карточка памяти…
С изготовителем этого оборудывания связи нет?

Аватара пользователя

Looker

эксперт
эксперт
Сообщения: 1081
Зарегистрирован: 09 фев 2011, 11:32
Имя: Дитрих Евгений Линусович
город/регион: Донецк
Благодарил (а): 236 раз
Поблагодарили: 174 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Looker »

Вот так выглядят биты поведения контроллера по умолчанию, так что, даже если есть программа в энергонезависимой памяти в ОЗУ для работы она не попадет.
Изображение

PS. Что доводилось чужое обслуживать — везде так было.

Отправлено спустя 4 минуты 5 секунд:

User1981 писал(а): ↑31 июл 2021, 10:19В data table monitor все как в новом проекте. Названия не было.

Имя программы нужно смотреть в окне RSWho RSLinx Classic.

_______________________________________________
Узкая специализация в широком смысле этого слова ведет к широкой идиотизации в узком смысле этого слова . (С) Бернард Шоу

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Извините, опять ночью не спал, поэтому плохо догоняю. Батарейка вот такая

[+]

т.е. без наклейки 1747-BA, либо поменяли батарейку, либо наклейку оторвали. Станок стоит с сентября — октября 2020 года. Название программы «ML1400»

[+]

Но когда я делаю upload программа должна отображаться или ещё какие то дополнительные манипуляции должны быть?
И ещё, если батарейку отключали, то программа должна остаться или нет?

Отправлено спустя 4 минуты 22 секунды:
А какие биты мне надо изменить, чтобы программа не пропадала? Вот мой статус файл

[+]

Отправлено спустя 6 минут 31 секунду:
И ещё что означает User Program Type S:63 = 9001h ?

У вас нет необходимых прав для просмотра вложений в этом сообщении.

Andreyit

освоился
освоился
Сообщения: 298
Зарегистрирован: 06 фев 2020, 16:09
Имя: Андрей
город/регион: Екатеринбург
Поблагодарили: 54 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Andreyit »

User1981 писал(а): ↑01 авг 2021, 14:46
И ещё, если батарейку отключали, то программа должна остаться или нет?

Программа слетает. Батарейка держит память энергозависимую. Точнее как, при включении питания заряжается ионистор (не моментально) и если что-то с батареей случилось, он держит память пару-тройку дней (иногда неделю) на своем заряде, чтобы обслуживающий персонал увидел загоревшийся светодиод и быстренько заменил батарейку. Если ионистор не был заряжен и батарейку отключили, то сразу слетает программа.

User1981 писал(а): ↑01 авг 2021, 14:46
Станок стоит с сентября — октября 2020 года.

И никто не следил как там у него дела? Еще и ровненько зимой.
Дырка под карту памяти:

ттттт.JPG

У вас нет необходимых прав для просмотра вложений в этом сообщении.

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Кажется разобрался, в качестве эксперимента изменил пустую программу, залил, отключил батарейку, подождал, затем подключил батарейку, включил питание, online, и вуаля — никакой программы нет, ошибка s:6: 1h, т.е. в том виде, в котором я снял плк со станка! По крайней мере не я стёр программу, получается если на обесточенном плк села батарейка, и отсутствует модуль памяти, то программа — пропадает. А что эту программу нельзя было энергонезависимой сделать?

Аватара пользователя

Looker

эксперт
эксперт
Сообщения: 1081
Зарегистрирован: 09 фев 2011, 11:32
Имя: Дитрих Евгений Линусович
город/регион: Донецк
Благодарил (а): 236 раз
Поблагодарили: 174 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Looker »

User1981 писал(а): ↑01 авг 2021, 14:46А какие биты мне надо изменить, чтобы программа не пропадала? Вот мой статус файл

Как и ожидалось — все по умолчанию.
Установить в 1:
S:1/10 — загружать из энергонезависимой в ОЗУ, при ошибке в ОЗУ.
S:1/12 — переход в режим RUN по включению питания.
S:1/8 (на вкладке Errors) — стирать ошибку при включении питания.
Записать в энергонезависимую память с этими установленными битами.

_______________________________________________
Узкая специализация в широком смысле этого слова ведет к широкой идиотизации в узком смысле этого слова . (С) Бернард Шоу

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Видите ли в нашей деревне очень туго со специалистами, поэтому обслуживания можно сказать нет. А потом спрашивают: Вообще ничего нельзя сделать? Вернее специалисты не хотят работать за копейки, а владельцы оборудования хотят как говорится и рыбку съесть и на … не сесть.
Извините за оффтоп, накипело!

Аватара пользователя

Looker

эксперт
эксперт
Сообщения: 1081
Зарегистрирован: 09 фев 2011, 11:32
Имя: Дитрих Евгений Линусович
город/регион: Донецк
Благодарил (а): 236 раз
Поблагодарили: 174 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Looker »

User1981 писал(а): ↑01 авг 2021, 15:47А что эту программу нельзя было энергонезависимой сделать?

В Micrologix 1000 и 1200 нет батарейки, но помнит все — успевает записать на флеш.

_______________________________________________
Узкая специализация в широком смысле этого слова ведет к широкой идиотизации в узком смысле этого слова . (С) Бернард Шоу

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Да с MicroLogix 1200 я работал, на кислородной станции плк встал по major error, у них зимой подогрева помещения не было. Пришел, подключился, стёр ошибку и запустил.

User1981

здесь недавно
здесь недавно
Сообщения: 9
Зарегистрирован: 02 май 2019, 14:53
Имя: Евгений
Страна: Туркменистан
город/регион: Дашогуз
Благодарил (а): 3 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

User1981 »

Всем привет! На втором станке плк в рабочем состоянии, программу слил, залил на первый, первый в работе! На втором на оперпанели поменял батарейку, второй в работе!
Всем спасибо за участие!
P.S. Теперь есть программа от станка

Looker писал(а): ↑01 авг 2021, 15:54
P.S. Ищется программа от турецкого настилочного станка Ozbilim P4ADD (Astron).

если кому то нужно, поделюсь.
Тему можно закрывать. Ещё раз спасибо.

Аватара пользователя

Looker

эксперт
эксперт
Сообщения: 1081
Зарегистрирован: 09 фев 2011, 11:32
Имя: Дитрих Евгений Линусович
город/регион: Донецк
Благодарил (а): 236 раз
Поблагодарили: 174 раза

MicroLogix1400 и Monitouch S806 слетела программа

Сообщение

Looker »

Looker писал(а): ↑01 авг 2021, 15:54P.S. Ищется программа от турецкого настилочного станка Ozbilim P4ADD (Astron).

Опять не моя цитата!!! Сегодня получил благодарность от User1981, иначе бы не увидел.
Оригинал:

User1981 писал(а): ↑31 июл 2021, 02:32P.S. Ищется программа от турецкого настилочного станка Ozbilim P4ADD (Astron).

_______________________________________________
Узкая специализация в широком смысле этого слова ведет к широкой идиотизации в узком смысле этого слова . (С) Бернард Шоу

Вернуться в «ПЛК»


Перейти

  • Работа форума
  • База знаний (Knowledge Exchange)
  • ↳   Eplan Electric P8
  • ↳   Общий F.A.Q.
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   Новости
  • ↳   Ошибки
  • ↳   Проект
  • ↳   Изделия
  • ↳   Устройства
  • ↳   Соединения
  • ↳   Кабели
  • ↳   Клеммы
  • ↳   ПЛК
  • ↳   Компоновка 2D
  • ↳   Макросы
  • ↳   Eplan API
  • ↳   Сценарии (Только готовые решения)
  • ↳   Внешняя обработка
  • ↳   ProPanel
  • ↳   Инструкции ProPanel (Только готовые решения)
  • ↳   Прочие направления Eplan
  • ↳   FieldSys (Топология)
  • ↳   Preplanning
  • ↳   Harness proD
  • ↳   EEC One
  • ↳   Advantech
  • ↳   F.A.Q., Инструкции
  • ↳   Allen Bradley
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   ПЛК
  • ↳   Операторские панели
  • ↳   B&R Automation
  • ↳   F.A.Q.
  • ↳   Danfoss
  • ↳   DEIF A/S
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   UNI-LINE
  • ↳   MULTI-LINE
  • ↳   MULTI-LINE 300
  • ↳   Emerson
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   КИП и регуляторы
  • ↳   DeltaV
  • ↳   ОВЕН
  • ↳   Прософт-Системы
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   ПЛК REGUL
  • ↳   Schneider Electric
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   ПЛК
  • ↳   Панели оператора
  • ↳   SCADA
  • ↳   Электротехника
  • ↳   Приводная техника
  • ↳   SIEMENS
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   LOGO!
  • ↳   ПЛК SIMATIC (S7-200, S7-1200, S7-300, S7-400, S7-1500, ET200)
  • ↳   Simatic Step7
  • ↳   Simatic TIA Portal
  • ↳   Simatic PCS 7
  • ↳   Операторские панели
  • ↳   WinCC
  • ↳   Приводная техника (Sinamics, Micromaster, Masterdrive, Simoreg, Simotics)
  • ↳   SmartGen
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   Промышленные (береговые) контроллеры
  • ↳   Морские контроллеры и устройства
  • ↳   WEINTEK (операторские панели)
  • ↳   F.A.Q., Инструкции
  • ↳   Архив
  • ↳   Микроконтроллеры и электроника
  • ↳   Arduino
  • ↳   Raspberry
  • ↳   Другие микроконтроллеры
  • ↳   Электроника
  • Общие вопросы АСУТП
  • ↳   Общие вопросы
  • ↳   Вопросы от студентов
  • ↳   Литература
  • ↳   Новости и отчётность
  • ↳   Нормативы, ГОСТы, стандарты
  • ↳   Информационная безопасность
  • ↳   Проектирование и САПР
  • ↳   Системная интеграция
  • ↳   Разбор полетов
  • ↳   Работа
  • ↳   Заготовки для базы знаний
  • ↳   Производство и технология
  • ↳   MES — Системы автоматизации управления производством
  • ↳   Метрология, КИП и датчики
  • ↳   Исполнительные устройства, регуляторы
  • ↳   Средний уровень автоматизации (управляющий)
  • ↳   ПЛК Flexem
  • ↳   Алгоритмы
  • ↳   Операторские панели
  • ↳   Верхний уровень автоматизации (отображение)
  • ↳   GE iFix
  • ↳   Wonderware Intouch
  • ↳   MasterScada
  • ↳   SCADA+
  • ↳   Альфа платформа
  • ↳   Интерфейсы, протоколы, связь
  • ↳   Радиосвязь
  • ↳   Полезное ПО
  • ↳   Электротехника, энергетика и электропривод
  • ↳   Генераторы, электростанции и силовые агрегаты
  • ↳   Теплотехника
  • ↳   Подбор аналогов
  • F.A.Q.
  • ↳   Документация (вариант 1)
  • ↳   Документация (вариант 2)
  • ↳   Электротехника и электроэнергетика
  • ↳   F.A.Q. по программируемым логическим контроллерам (PLC)
  • ↳   Обсуждение F.A.Q. по PLC
  • ↳   F.A.Q. по выбору PLC
  • ↳   F.A.Q. по аппаратной части PLC
  • ↳   F.A.Q. по языкам программирования
  • ↳   F.A.Q. по структуре программ
  • ↳   F.A.Q. по взаимодействию PLC с HMI
  • О жизни
  • ↳   Для дома, для семьи
  • ↳   Комната смеха
  • ↳   Электродвижение

  • Page 1
    User Manual MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Bulletin 1766 Controllers and 1762 Expansion I/O…
  • Page 2
    Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, MicroLogix, RSLinx, RSLogix 500 and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
  • Page 3: Summary Of Changes

    Summary of Changes To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph. The table below lists the sections that document new features and additional or updated information about existing features.

  • Page 4
    Chapter Summary of Changes Summary of Changes Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Component Descriptions ……… . . 2 MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built-in Real-Time Clock . . 2 1762 Expansion I/O .

  • Page 6
    Table of Contents DIN Rail Mounting……… . . 21 Panel Mounting .
  • Page 7
    Table of Contents Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector. . Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network … . . 75 Connecting the AIC+ ……….76 Cable Selection Guide .
  • Page 8
    Online Editing Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1400 Online Editing User ……….. . 151 A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing .
  • Page 9
    Replacement Parts MicroLogix 1400 Replacement Kits ……175 Lithium Battery (1747-BA) ……..175 Installation .
  • Page 10
    Internal Indications ……… . 256 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files ….256 DNP3 Data Files .
  • Page 11
    MicroLogix 1400 Controllers and Ethernet Communication ..351 MicroLogix 1400 Performance Considerations ….352 Ethernet Interface MicroLogix 1400 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network.
  • Page 12
    Table of Contents Index Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 13: Preface

    If you do not, obtain the proper training before using this product. Purpose of this Manual This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1400 controllers and expansion I/O. It describes the procedures you use to install, wire, and troubleshoot your controller.

  • Page 14: Related Documentation

    Information on the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers instruction set. Reference Manual 1766-RM001 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers, including a Instructions 1766 -IN001 mounting template for easy installation. Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual A description on how to install and connect an AIC+.

  • Page 15: Hardware Overview

    Chapter Hardware Overview Hardware Features The Bulletin 1766, MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller contains a power supply, input and output circuits, a processor, an isolated combination RS-232/485 communication port, an Ethernet port, and a non-isolated RS-232 communication port. Each controller supports 32 discrete I/O points(20 digital inputs, 12 discrete outputs) and 6 analog I/O points(4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs : 1766-L32BWAA, 1766-AWAA and 1766-BXBA only).

  • Page 16: Component Descriptions

    The program and data in your MicroLogix 1400 is non-volatile and is stored when the power is lost to the controller. The memory module provides additional backup that can be stored separately.

  • Page 17: 1762 Expansion I/O

    Figure 1 — 1766-MM1 Memory Module 44536 1762 Expansion I/O 1762 expansion I/O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1400 controller, as shown below. A maximum of seven I/O modules, in any combination, can be connected to a controller. See Appendix H to determine how much heat a certain combination generates.

  • Page 18: Communication Cables

    1762-IT4 4-Channel Thermocouple/mV Input Module Communication Cables Use only the following communication cables with the MicroLogix 1400 controllers. These cables are required for Class I Div. 2 applications. • 1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later • 1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later •…

  • Page 19: Communication Options

    RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0), an Ethernet port (Channel 1) and a non-isolated RS-232 communication port (Channel 2). The Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports on the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected to the following: • operator interfaces, personal computers, etc. using DF1 Full Duplex point-to-point •…

  • Page 20
    Chapter 1 Hardware Overview information, but also includes the data table memory map and data table monitor screen using a standard web browser. See Chapter 4 for more information on connecting to the available communication options. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 21: Install Your Controller

    Chapter Install Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your controller. The only tools you require are a flat or Phillips head screwdriver and drill. Topics include: • agency certifications • compliance to European Union Directives • installation considerations •…

  • Page 22: Low Voltage Directive

    EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers, Part 2 — Equipment Requirements and Tests. For specific information required by EN 61131-2, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley publications: • Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4.1 •…

  • Page 23: Safety Considerations

    WARNING: Do not place the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller in direct sunlight. Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight could degrade the LCD display and have adverse effects on the controller.

  • Page 24: Disconnecting Main Power

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations. Environment Classification Communication Cables Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Environment 1761-CBL-AC00 Series C or later 1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later 1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later 1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later 1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later 2707-NC9 Series C or later…

  • Page 25: Power Distribution

    If the power source cannot supply this inrush current, the source voltage may sag momentarily. The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1400 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly. However, the effect of a…

  • Page 26: Loss Of Power Source

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller voltage sag on other equipment should be considered. For example, a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source. The following considerations determine whether the power source must be required to supply high inrush current: •…

  • Page 27: Preventing Excessive Heat

    Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Preventing Excessive Heat For most applications, normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range. Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained. Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation. In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure.

  • Page 28: Using Emergency-Stop Switches

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed. The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller.

  • Page 29: Schematic (Using Iec Symbols)

    Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Schematic (Using IEC Symbols) 230V AC Disconnect Fuse 230V AC Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will Transformer remove power from the external I/O Master Control Relay (MCR) circuits, stopping machine motion. 115V AC Cat.

  • Page 30: Schematic (Using Ansi/Csa Symbols)

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols) 230V AC Disconnect Fuse 230V AC Output Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will Transformer remove power from the external I/O Master Control Relay (MCR) circuits, stopping machine motion. 115V AC or Cat.

  • Page 31: Using The Battery

    4. Use a screwdriver as in step 1 to remove the memory module in the future. Using the Battery The MicroLogix 1400 controller is equipped with a replaceable battery (catalog number 1747-BA). The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller shows the status of the replaceable battery.

  • Page 32: Connecting The Battery Wire Connector

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller WARNING: When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding. For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries, including handling and disposal of leaking batteries, see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries, publication AG…

  • Page 33: Controller Mounting Dimensions

    Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Controller Mounting Dimensions 44516 1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32AWA, 1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32BWAA, 1766-L32AWAA, 1766-L32BXBA Dimension Measurement 90 mm (3.5 in.) 180 mm (7.087 in.) 87 mm (3.43 in.) Controller and Expansion The controller mounts horizontally, with the expansion I/O extending to the right of the controller.

  • Page 34: Mounting The Controller

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller Mounting the Controller MicroLogix 1400 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial environment when installed in accordance with these instructions. Specifically, this equipment is intended for use in clean, dry environments (Pollution degree 2…

  • Page 35: Din Rail Mounting

    Install Your Controller Chapter 2 DIN Rail Mounting The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm (0.55 in.) in the open position. A flat-blade screwdriver is required for removal of the controller. The controller can be mounted to EN50022-35×7.5 or EN50022-35×15 DIN rails. DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown below.

  • Page 36: Panel Mounting

    Mount to panel using #8 or M4 screws. To install your controller using mounting screws: 1. Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions, publication 1766-IN001. 2. Secure the template to the mounting surface. (Make sure your controller is spaced properly.

  • Page 37: 1762 Expansion I/O Dimensions

    DIN rail mounting area of the module against the DIN rail. The latch momentarily opens and locks into place. Use DIN rail end anchors (Allen-Bradley part number 1492-EA35 or 1492-EAH35) for vibration or shock environments. The following illustration shows the location of the end anchors.

  • Page 38: Panel Mounting

    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller End anchor End anchor 44974 1762 expansion I/O must be mounted horizontally as illustrated. For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns, use the panel mounting method described below, instead of DIN rail mounting. Panel Mounting Use the dimensional template shown below to mount the module.

  • Page 39: Connecting Expansion I/O

    Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Connecting Expansion I/O The expansion I/O module is attached to the controller or another I/O module by means of a flat ribbon cable after mounting, as shown below. 44975 Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect modules. Do not pull on the ribbon cable.

  • Page 40
    Chapter 2 Install Your Controller Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 41: Wire Your Controller

    Chapter Wire Your Controller This chapter describes how to wire your controller and expansion I/O. Topics include: • wire requirements • using surge suppressors • grounding the controller • wiring diagrams • sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams • controller I/O wiring •…

  • Page 42: Wire Without Spade Lugs

    The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5.5 mm (0.220 in.). The input and output terminals of the MicroLogix 1400 controller are designed for a 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) wide spade (standard for #6 screw for up to 14 AWG) or a 4 mm (metric #4) fork terminal.

  • Page 43: Using Surge Suppressors

    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 When using spade lugs, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to pry the finger-safe cover from the terminal blocks as shown below. Then loosen the terminal screw. Finger-safe cover 44528 Using Surge Suppressors Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when switching inductive load devices, such as motor starters and solenoids, the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the operating life of the controllers output contacts is required.

  • Page 44: Recommended Surge Suppressors

    Output Device Output Device Surge Suppressor RC Network Varistor Recommended Surge Suppressors Use the Allen-Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with relays, contactors, and starters. Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 100/104K 700K 24…48V AC…

  • Page 45: Grounding The Controller

    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 100C, (C09 — C97) 24…48V AC 100-FSC48 110…280V AC 100-FSC280 380…480V AC 100-FSC480 12…55V AC, 12…77V DC 100-FSV55 56…136V AC, 78…180V DC 100-FSV136 137…277V AC, 181…250V DC 100-FSV277 278…575V AC 100-FSV575…

  • Page 46: Wiring Diagrams

    Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1400 controllers. Controllers with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. (Sinking and sourcing does not apply to AC inputs.) Refer to Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on page 36.

  • Page 47: Terminal Block Layouts

    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity improvement. This connection must be made for safety purposes on AC-powered controllers.

  • Page 48
    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller ATTENTION: The 24V DC sensor supply of the 1766-L32BWA and 1766-L32BWAA controllers should not be used to power output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices, for example, sensors and switches. See Master Control Relay on page 13 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits.
  • Page 49
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Wire Types and Sizes Solid wire Cu-90⋅C (194⋅F) 14…22 AWG Stranded wire Cu-90⋅C (194⋅F) 16…22 AWG Wiring torque = 0.791Nm (7 in-lb) rated. Output Terminal Grouping Outputs Output Terminal Controllers Output Group Description Voltage Terminal 1766-L32BWA Group 0 Isolated relay output…
  • Page 50: Sinking And Sourcing Wiring Diagrams

    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Sinking and Sourcing Any of the MicroLogix 1400 DC embedded input groups can be configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is wired on the group. Wiring Diagrams Type Definition Sinking Input The input energizes when high-level voltage is applied to the input terminal (active high).

  • Page 51
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 7 — 1766-L32BWA/L32BWAA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram +DCa +DCb +DCc 24V DC Sensor Power -DCa -DCb -DCc DC OUT — 24V + COM 0 COM 1 COM 2 IN10 IN11 1766-L32BWAA only +DCd -DCd COM 3 IN12 IN13…
  • Page 52: Controller I/O Wiring

    To help reduce the effects of environmental noise, install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated (for example, NEMA) enclosure. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded.

  • Page 53: Wiring Your Analog Channels

    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Wiring Your Analog Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data. Channels Sensor 2 (V) Voltage Sensor 0 (V) Voltage Input Terminal Block I/10 COM 3 I/13 I/15 I/17 I/19 IV0(+) IV2(+)

  • Page 54: Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines

    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Figure 13 — Analog Output Voltage Load O/10 O/11 Output Terminal Block Voltage Load 44680 Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines Consider the following when wiring your analog channels: • The analog common (COM) is connected to earth ground inside the module.

  • Page 55: Minimizing Electrical Noise On Analog Channels

    Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on analog signals: • install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated enclosure, for example, NEMA. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded.

  • Page 56: Grounding Your Analog Cable

    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Grounding Your Analog Cable Use shielded communication cable (Belden #8761). The Belden cable has two signal wires (black and clear), one drain wire, and a foil shield. The drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable. Foil Shield Black Wire Insulation…

  • Page 57
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 16 — 1762-IQ8 Wiring Diagram +DC (sinking) -DC (sourcing) IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 24V DC IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 Common connected internally. -DC (sinking) +DC (sourcing) 44571 Figure 17 — 1762-IQ16 Wiring Diagram +DC (Sinking)
  • Page 58
    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Figure 18 — 1762-IQ32T Wiring Diagram 44920 Figure 19 — 1762-OA8 Wiring Diagram OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 44573 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 59
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 20 — 1762-OB8 Wiring Diagram +VDC OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 24V DC (source) OUT 6 OUT 7 DC COM 44574 Figure 21 — 1762-OB16 Wiring Diagram VDC+ OUT 0 OUT 1…
  • Page 60
    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Figure 22 — 1762-OB32T Wiring Diagram 44925 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 61
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 23 — 1762-OV32T Wiring Diagram 44915 Figure 24 — 1762-OW8 Wiring Diagram L1 VAC1 + VAC-VDC 1 OUT 0 L2 DC1 COM OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT3 L1 VAC2 + VAC-VDC2 OUT 4 OUT 5 L2 DC2 COM OUT 6 OUT 7…
  • Page 62
    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Figure 25 — 1762-OW16 Wiring Diagram VAC-VDC OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 VAC-VDC OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT 10 OUT 11 OUT 12 OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 15 44577…
  • Page 63
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 26 — 1762-OX6I Wiring Diagram L1-0 L1 OR +DC OUT0 N.C. L2 OR -DC OUT0 N.O. L1 OR +DC L1-1 OUT1 N.C. OUT1 N.O. L2 OR -DC L1-2 L1 OR +DC OUT2 N.C. L2 OR -DC OUT2 N.O.
  • Page 64: Analog Wiring

    Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches located on the module’s circuit board and the input type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001. You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module.

  • Page 65
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 channel 0; switch 2 controls channel 1. The factory default setting for both switch 1 and switch 2 is Current. Switch positions are shown below. Ch0 Ch1 Switch Location Voltage (OFF) Current (ON) Default Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 66
    The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals, Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001.
  • Page 67
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 28 — 1762-IF2OF2 Terminal Block Layout IN 0 (+) IN 0 (-) IN 1 (+) IN 1 (-) V Out 0 I Out 0 V Out 1 I Out 1 Common connected internally. Figure 29 — Differential Sensor Transmitter Types IN 0 (+) Analog Sensor IN 0 (-)
  • Page 68
    Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches located on the module’s circuit board and the input type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001. You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module.
  • Page 69
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 31 — 1762-IF4 Terminal Block Layout IN 0 (+) IN 0 (-) IN 1 (+) IN 1 (-) IN 2 (+) IN 2 (-) IN 3 (+) IN 3 (-) Commons internally connected. Figure 32 — Differential Sensor Transmitter Types IN 0 (+) Analog Sensor IN 0 (-)
  • Page 70
    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Figure 33 — Sensor/Transmitter Types 2-Wire Transmitter Transmitter Module Power IN + Supply IN — Transmitter 3-Wire Transmitter Signal Supply Module Power IN + Supply IN — Transmitter 4-Wire Transmitter Module Signal Supply Power IN + Supply IN — All power supplies rated N.E.C.
  • Page 71
    Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 1762-OF4 Wiring I out 0 Current Load I out 1 I out 2 I out 3 V out 0 Voltage Load V out 1 V out 2 V out 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 72
    Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 73: Communication Connections

    The Ethernet communication channel, Channel 1, allows your controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices providing 10 Mbps/100 Mbps transfer rate. MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Ethernet/IP with CIP explicit messaging (message exchange), BOOTP/DHCP Client, HTTP Server, SMTP Client, DNS Client, SNMP Server, Socket Interface with CIP Generic messaging, Modbus TCP Client/Server and DNP3 over IP.

  • Page 74: Default Communication Configuration

    Chapter 4 Communication Connections For more information on MicroLogix 1400 communications, refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001. Default Communication The MicroLogix 1400 communication Channel 0 has the following default communication configuration. Configuration For Channel 0, the default configuration is present when: •…

  • Page 75: Changing Communication Configuration

    Communication Connections Chapter 4 mode. Hold down the OK key more than 5 seconds to toggle the communication mode on the Main Menu screen. The Communication Toggle Functionality only affects the communication configuration of Channel 0. Changing Communication Configuration Follow the procedure below to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back.

  • Page 76
    Chapter 4 Communication Connections 2. Press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed. 3. Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys, and then press the OK key. 4. The DCOMM Configuration screen is displayed. In this example, the current status is Disable.
  • Page 77: Connecting To The Rs-232 Port

    6. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen, as shown in step 3. Connecting to the RS-232 There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol: using a point-to-point Port connection, or using a modem.

  • Page 78: Making A Df1 Point-To-Point Connection

    MicroLogix controllers and the 1747-DPS1 network port . Making a DF1 Point-to-Point Connection You can connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable (1761-CBL-PM02) from your personal computer’s serial port to the controller’s Channel 0. The recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full-Duplex.

  • Page 79: Using A Modem

    (1) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. Using a Modem You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1400 controller (using DF1 Full-Duplex protocol), to multiple controllers (using DF1 Half-Duplex protocol), or Modbus RTU Slave protocol via Channel 0, as shown in the following illustration.

  • Page 80
    Chapter 4 Communication Connections MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout When connecting MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to a modem using an RS-232 cable, the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15.24 m (50 ft). DTE Device…
  • Page 81
    Communication Connections Chapter 4 Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable If you construct your own null modem cable, the maximum cable length is 15.24m (50 ft) with a 25-pin or 9-pin connector. Refer to the following typical pinout: Optical Isolator Modem 9-Pin 25-Pin…
  • Page 82: Connecting To A Df1 Half-Duplex Network

    Chapter 4 Communication Connections Connecting to a DF1 Half-Duplex Network When a communication port is configured for DF1 Half-Duplex Slave, available parameters include the following: DF1 Half-Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2 KBps, 38.4 KBps Parity none, even Node Address…

  • Page 83
    Communication Connections Chapter 4 DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave Network Use the following diagram for DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave protocol without hardware handshaking. SLC 5/03 MicroLogix 1400 processor Master 1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02 1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02 DF1 Slave radio modem or lease line AIC+…
  • Page 84: Connecting To A Rs-485 Network

    MicroLogix 1400 controllers to the RS-485 network. Network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your RS-485 network directly without using an external optical isolator, such as Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in the illustrations below, because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller.

  • Page 85: Dh-485 Configuration Parameters

    Communication Connections Chapter 4 DH-485 Configuration Parameters When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the following parameters can be changed: DH-485 Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600, 19.2 KBps Node Address 1…31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1…4 See Software Considerations on page 215 for tips on setting the parameters listed above.

  • Page 86
    Chapter 4 Communication Connections DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1400 Controller AIC+ AIC+ TERM TERM PanelView SHLD SHLD CHS GND CHS GND DC SOURCE DC SOURCE CABLE CABLE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL SLC 5/04 PanelView 550 DH-485 Network AIC+ AIC+ AIC+ AIC+…
  • Page 87: Recommended Tools

    Communication Connections Chapter 4 Typical 3-Node Network (Channel 0 Connection) PanelView 550 PanelView MicroLogix 1400 RJ45 port 1761-CBL-AS09 or 1761-CBL-AS03 TERM 1747-CP3 or SHLD CHS GND 1761-CBL-AM00 1761-CBL-AC00 or 1761-CBL-HM02 DC SOURCE CABLE EXTERNAL 44599 Recommended Tools To connect a DH-485 network to additional devices, you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable to the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter.

  • Page 88: Connecting The Communication Cable To The Dh-485 Connector

    Use these instructions for wiring the Belden #3106A or #9842 cable. (See Cable Selection Guide on page 77 if you are using standard Allen-Bradley cables.) Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector A daisy-chained network is recommended.

  • Page 89: Grounding And Terminating The Dh-485 Network

    Communication Connections Chapter 4 Multiple Cable Connection When connecting multiple cables to the DH-485 connector, use the following diagram. to Previous Device to Next Device Connections using Belden #3106A Cable For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield/Drain Non-jacketed Terminal 2 — Shield Blue…

  • Page 90: Connecting The Aic

    Shield ChassisGround Connecting the AIC+ You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH-485 network via Channel 0 directly without using an optical isolator, such as AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, because Channel 0 is isolated. However, you need to use an AIC+ to connect your PC or other MicroLogix Family products, such as MicroLogix 1200, to a DH-485 network.

  • Page 91: Cable Selection Guide

    SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, ch 0 port 2 external 1761-CBL-PM02 2 m (6.5 ft) MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 ch 0 port 1 external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port 2 external PanelView 550 through NULL modem port 2 external adapter DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro…

  • Page 92
    Port 1 on another AIC+ port 1 external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port 2 external External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.
  • Page 93
    Communication Connections Chapter 4 External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable. 1761-CBL-PM02 Series C (or equivalent) Cable Wiring Diagram 6 8 7 44605 Programming Controller…
  • Page 94: Recommended User-Supplied Components

    If you are making a cable to connect to port 2, you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen-Bradley cable shown above. In the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB-9 connector.

  • Page 95: Safety Considerations

    Communication Connections Chapter 4 Safety Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or non-hazardous locations only. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD AIC+ must be operated from an external power source. This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.

  • Page 96: Powering The Aic

    1761-NET-AIC, 1761-NET-ENI, and the 1761-NET-ENIW, these controllers provide the power for the interface converter modules. The MicroLogix 1400 does not provide 24V DC communication power through communication ports. Instead these pins are used to provide RS-485 communications directly. Any AIC+, ENI, or ENIW not connected to a MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 controller requires a 24V DC power supply.

  • Page 97: Connecting To Ethernet

    Connecting to Ethernet You can connect directly a MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet port (Channel 1). You do not need to use an Ethernet interface card, such as the Ethernet Interface (ENI) and (ENIW), catalog number 1761-NET-ENI and 1761-NET-ENIW, to connect your MicroLogix 1400 controller to an Ethernet network.

  • Page 98: Ethernet Connections

    End view of RJ 45 Plug Looking into a RJ45 Jack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 For more information on using ethernet cables with MicroLogix 1400, see. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…

  • Page 99: Using The Lcd

    Chapter Using the LCD This chapter describes how to use the LCD and keypad on the MicroLogix 1400 controller. Topics include: • operating principles • I/O status display • monitoring user defined target files • using the mode switch • using a user defined LCD screen •…

  • Page 100: Operating Principles

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD LCD and Keypad Feature Description LCD Screen Keypad (ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, and Right Buttons) Operating Principles MicroLogix 1400 LCD Menu Structure Tree Startup Screen User defined? Main Menu I/O Status Monitoring Integer Long Integer…

  • Page 101
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 LCD Default Startup Screen You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by defining a ASCII data file that contains the bitmap format image to display on the Startup screen and specifying the CBL element of the LCD Function File to the address of this ASCII file.
  • Page 102
    LCD display. For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup screen, refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001. After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is displayed…
  • Page 103: Main Menu And Default Screen

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Main Menu and Default Screen The Main menu consists of five menu items: I/O Status, Monitoring, Mode Switch, User Display, and Advanced Set. LCD Main Menu Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…

  • Page 104
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Main Menu Items Menu Item Description For details, refer to I/O Status Displays the I/O Status screen, which shows the I/O status of the I/O Status on page 93 embedded digital I/O. Monitoring Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an Monitor User Defined Target Files on page 95 integer file.
  • Page 105: Operating Buttons

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Operating Buttons Button Function Cursor Buttons Move cursor Select menu item Choose file numbers, values, etc. Next menu level, store your entry, apply the changes Previous menu level, cancel your entry 44612 Using Menus to Choose Values Press •…

  • Page 106: Cursor Display

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Cursor Display There are two different cursor types: Selection cursor (the symbol “ ”) is displayed left to the selected item. • Move cursor with the up/down arrows Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block: •…

  • Page 107: Setting Values

    Down arrow = decrement I/O Status The MicroLogix 1400 provides I/O status indicators on the LCD screen. You can view the status of inputs and outputs on the I/O Status screen on the LCD, as shown below. The I/O status indicators on this screen are updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I/O status in real time, regardless of controller scan time.

  • Page 108: Viewing I/O Status

    TO element in the LCD Function File. For more information, refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001.

  • Page 109: Monitor User Defined Target Files

    IMPORTANT in the TUF element, as well as the appropriate number of elements, exist in the MicroLogix 1400 user program. The data protection for a file depends on the LCD edit disable setting. When LCD Edit Disable is set (1: Checked) in file properties, the corresponding data file is considered read-only by and the “Protected!”…

  • Page 110: Monitoring A Bit File

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD LCD Edit Disable is clear (0: Unchecked), the “UnProtected!” message is displayed and the corresponding data file is editable from the LCD keypad. Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad, the IMPORTANT control program or other communication devices do have access to this data.

  • Page 111
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 • LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked(disable) • The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify the bit file B3 as the target bit file to monitor on the LCD, as shown in the screen capture below.
  • Page 112
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file B3. 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad. 2. Press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The File Number prompt is displayed.
  • Page 113
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 7. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value OFF (0) is applied. Note that the target bit, “0/0” in this example, is flashing. The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit position. You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro programming software.
  • Page 114: Monitoring Integer Files

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 8. Now, we will view an example of the data value of a protected property. If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked (enable), the “Protected!” message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited from the LCD. 9.

  • Page 115
    Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you IMPORTANT specify in the TUF element, as well as the appropriate number of elements, exists in the MicroLogix 1400 user program. The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration information with integer file number 7 (LCD:0.TUF=7).
  • Page 116
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD • The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify the integer file N7 as the target integer file to monitor on the LCD, as shown in the screen capture below. •…
  • Page 117
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 4. The current data value (ON) of the N7:0 word is displayed. Note that the target word “0”, which is right next to “N7:”, is flashing, which means the cursor is at the target word position. 5.
  • Page 118
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 8. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Down key once. The sign digit will change to “-”, as shown below. Note that “-” is still flashing, which means the cursor is still at the data value position. 9.
  • Page 119: Monitoring Double Integer Files

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 10. Now, we will view an example of the data value of a protected property. If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked (enable), the “Protected!” message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD. 11.

  • Page 120
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD File and download your application program to the controller. The TUF element can only be changed by a program download. The value stored in the TUF element identifies the double integer file with which the LCD will interface. Valid double integer files are L9, and L10 through L255. When the LCD reads a valid double integer file number, it can access up to 256 words (0 to 255) on the LCD screen.
  • Page 121
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 • LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked(disable) • The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 9 to specify the integer file L9 as the target file to monitor on the LCD, as shown in the screen capture below.
  • Page 122
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad. 2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The File Number prompt is displayed. 3.
  • Page 123
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 6. Press the Left key twice. Then, the cursor will position at the third digit. Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3. 7. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Up key once. The second digit will change to «1».
  • Page 124
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 10. You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro programming software. After changing the data value of a target double word, press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes. 11.
  • Page 125: Monitor Floating Point Files

    105. However, you will not be able to edit floating point files from the LCD. The Protected! message is displayed on the LCD for floating point files. MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers display an «Unprotected!» message but you will not be able to edit the corresponding data file.

  • Page 126: Using The Mode Switch

    Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001. Using the Mode Switch The MicroLogix 1400 provides the controller mode switch on the LCD. The possible positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM, REMOTE, and RUN. You can change mode switch position using the Mode Switch screen on the LCD, as shown below.

  • Page 127: Controller Modes

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Controller Modes The table below shows the possible controller modes when the mode switch positions at PROGRAM, REMOTE, or RUN. For example, if the Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control program with running it for a single scan, you have to first change mode switch position to REMOTE before you run the control program in the remote test single scan mode with your RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro programming software.

  • Page 128
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD • How to forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is powered up: Press ESC key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up. The following LCD screen appears if it’s successfully done. Note that I/O output status may be changed for some programs.
  • Page 129: Using A User Defined Lcd Screen

    Main Menu screen, as shown in step Using a User Defined LCD The MicroLogix 1400 controller allows you to use user defined LCD screens instead of the default built-in screens. Screen To use a user defined screen, you need to create a group of appropriate instructions using the LCD instruction in your application program.

  • Page 130: User Defined Lcd Screen

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD User Defined LCD Screen Follow these steps to display the user defined screen implemented in your application program. 1. On the Main Menu screen, select User Display by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key.

  • Page 131: Configuring Advanced Settings

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 If a user defined screen is used in your application program, the LCD screen is displayed, as shown below, according to the specific instructions used in your program. 3. Hold down the ESC key more than 3 seconds to return to the Main Menu screen, as shown below.

  • Page 132: Changing Key In Mode

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Changing Key In Mode Key In Modes There are two Key In modes, Continuous and Discrete. The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot on a trim pot screen, either Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen.

  • Page 133
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad. If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key.
  • Page 134: Using Communications Toggle Functionality

    7. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen, as shown in step Using Communications The MicroLogix 1400 provides the Communications Toggle Functionality, which allows you to change from the user-defined communication configuration Toggle Functionality to the default communications mode and back to the user defined communication configuration on Channel 0.

  • Page 135
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key.
  • Page 136: Configuring The Ip Address

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 5. When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller, only the MAC address that is assigned to your controller, represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX below, is displayed. A MAC address is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. Your controller ships with a unique MAC address assigned in the factory.

  • Page 137
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key.
  • Page 138
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 4. The password screen is displayed. Press Up, Down, Left and Right keys to enter the Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits. In this example, the current Master password is allocated as «1234». 5.
  • Page 139
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 7. If the password is correct, the Ethernet network type screen is displayed as below. Press Up or Down key to select the appropriate Ethernet mode. If you press the OK key at the static mode, the IP address flashes. 8.
  • Page 140: Configuring The Ethernet Port

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 10. After configuring the Gateway address, press the OK key. The Primary DNS is displayed. 11. After configuring the Primary DNS, press the OK key. The Secondary DNS is displayed. To exit the Network configuration Menu, press the ESC key on the LCD keypad at any time.

  • Page 141
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 2. Press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed. 3. If ENET Cfg is selected, press the OK key. If not, select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys, and then press the OK key. 4.
  • Page 142: Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 6. If the Master password is correct, the last configuration is displayed. In this example, the auto negotiation function is enabled and the 10/100Mbps link configuration is shown. 7. Press Up and Down key to select auto disable menu, then press the OK key. The fourth line on the LCD flashes.

  • Page 143
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key.
  • Page 144
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 5. The password screen is displayed. Press Up, Down, Left and Right keys to enter a Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits. In this example, the current Master password is allocated as «1234». After entering the Master password, press the OK key on the LCD keypad.
  • Page 145: Using Trim Pots

    Using Trim Pots Trim Pot Operation The MicroLogix 1400 controller provides two trimming potentiometers (trim pots, POT0 and POT1) which allow modification of integer data within the controller. The data value of each trim pot can be used throughout the control program for timers, counters, analog presets, depending upon the requirements of the application.

  • Page 146: Changing Data Value Of A Trim Pot

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot Follow these steps to change the data value of a trim pot, either POT0 or POT1. 1. On the Main Menu screen, select trim pot Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad.

  • Page 147: Trim Pot Configuration In Lcd Function File

    Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File The configuration for Trim Pots in the LCD Function File, including trim pot low and high values for data value range, is described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001.

  • Page 148: Viewing System Information

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Viewing System The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the system information for your controller. Information Follow these steps to view the system information for your controller. 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below.

  • Page 149: Viewing Fault Code

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Viewing Fault Code The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault occurs. When a fault occurs, the Fault Code screen is not displayed automatically. Only the FAULT LED on the controller flashes in red light. Therefore, you need to navigate into the Fault Code screen to identify the fault code on the LCD.

  • Page 150: Saving/Loading Communication Eeprom

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD If a fault is occurred, its fault code is displayed, as shown below. For more information on a specific fault code, refer to the Online Help of your RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro programming software. 5. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen, as shown in step Saving/Loading At the communication EEPROM screen, you can load/save user programs and…

  • Page 151
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 3. Select Comms EEPROM using the Down key, and then press the OK key. 4. Select Store to MM to save user program and data, and then press the OK key. 5. If your controller is in a non-executing mode, skip to the next step. Otherwise switch your controller to a non-executing mode.
  • Page 152
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 6. The usual method for using a memory module is to reuse the device. Select Reuse Device or Write Only by pressing the Up or Down keys. Once set to Write Only mode, write protection cannot be removed. If a IMPORTANT change is required, use a different memory module.
  • Page 153: Loading Communication Eeprom

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Loading communication EEPROM Follow these steps to load user programs and data from the memory module to the controller’s memory. 1. Select Load from MM to load user programs and data. 2. If your controller is in a non-executing mode, skip to the next step. Otherwise switch your controller to a non-executing mode.

  • Page 154: Configuring Contrast Value

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Configuring contrast value 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad. If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down by pressing the Down key.

  • Page 155: Configuring The Backlight

    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Configuring the backlight 1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad. If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down by pressing the Down key.

  • Page 156: Protocol Configuration

    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Protocol Configuration The following section provides a step-by-step guide on how to change the Modbus Node address. Modbus RTU Slave Node Address The user can set the Modbus RTU Slave Node address for Channel 0 or 2. The node address change will only be applicable after a power cycle.

  • Page 157
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 3. Select the Protocol Cfg using the Up and Down arrow keys, and then press the OK key. 4. Select the Modbus RTU Sl and then press the OK key. 5. The Modbus RTU Slave screen is displayed. Channel 0 is selected below. 6.
  • Page 158
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD 7. If the channel selected is not configured with the Modbus RTU Slave driver, then Modbus Not Configured is displayed, as shown below. 8. If channel 0 is configured with the Modbus RTU Slave driver with node address 100, the following screen will appear as shown.
  • Page 159
    Using the LCD Chapter 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 160
    Chapter 5 Using the LCD Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 161: Real-Time Clock Operation

    For more information on “Real-Time Clock Function File” and “Memory Module Information File”, refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001. One type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix 1400 controller. Catalog Number Function…

  • Page 162: Rtc Battery Operation

    Chapter 6 Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules RTC Battery Operation The real-time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the controller uses. The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit (RTC:0/BL), which shows the status of the replacement battery. When the battery is low, the indicator bit is set (1).

  • Page 163: User Program , User Data, Datalog And Recipe Back-Up

    (run or test) mode. To enable this feature, set the S:2/9 bit in the system status file. See “Status System File” in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication 1766-RM001 for more information.

  • Page 164: Removal/Insertion Under Power

    If a memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1400 is executing, the memory module is not recognized until either a power cycle occurs, or until the controller is placed in a non-executing mode (program mode, suspend mode or fault condition).

  • Page 165: Editing User

    At least one download is required before you can start online editing. Editing User If you are using a MicroLogix 1400 from out-of-box state or after clearing processor memory or a firmware upgrade, at least one download is required before starting online edits. If not, an error occurs and programming software will go offline due to a default image mismatch between programming software (RSLogix500) and the MicroLogix 1400.

  • Page 166: Types Of Online Editing

    LCD screen in the RUN mode. This prevents the use of the online editing feature. Types of Online Editing The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1400 processor’s mode switch position in LCD display and the processor’s mode. There are two types of online editing: •…

  • Page 167: Edit Functions In Runtime Online Editing

    Online Editing Chapter 7 ATTENTION: Use the online editing function while in the RUN mode to make minor changes to the ladder program. We recommend developing your program offline since ladder rung logic changes take effect immediately after testing your edits. Improper machine operation may occur, causing personnel injury or equipment damage.

  • Page 168
    Chapter 7 Online Editing Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 169: Specifications For Inputs

    Appendix Specifications General Specifications Description 1766-L32AWA/A 1766-L32BWA/A 1766-L32BXB/A Dimensions 90 x 180 x 87 mm HxWxD 3.5 x 7.08 x 3.43 in. Shipping weight 0.9 kg (2.0 lbs) Number of I/O 24 inputs (20 digital and 4 analog) and 14 outputs (12 digital and 2 analog) Power supply voltage 100…240V AC (-15%, +10%) at 47…63 Hz 24V DC (-15%, +10%) Class 2 SELV…

  • Page 170
    Appendix A Specifications Description 1766-L32AWA/A 1766-L32BWA/A, 1766-L32BXB/A Inputs 0 through 11 Inputs 12 and higher (12 high-speed DC inputs) (8 standard DC inputs) Off-State Leakage Current 2.5 mA max. 0.1 mA max 1.5 mA max. Nominal Impedance 12 kΩ at 50 Hz 2.0 kΩ…
  • Page 171
    Specifications Appendix A Relay and FET Outputs Description 1766-L32AWA/A, 1766-L32BXB/A 1766-L32BWA/A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current: Current per channel and group 2.5 A per channel 2.5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8…11 common Current per at 150V max 28 A or total of per-point…
  • Page 172
    Appendix A Specifications Figure 1 — MicroLogix 1400 DC Input Power Requirements for 1766-L32BXB/A Unit 1766-L32BXB/A Typical Power Requirements Calculated Expansion I/O Power Load (Watts) Figure 2 — 1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32BXBA FET Output Maximum output current (temperature dependent): FET Current per Point FET Total Current 1.75…
  • Page 173
    Specifications Appendix A AC Input Filter Settings Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms) Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum High-Speed DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 0 to 11) Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms) Maximum Counter Frequency (Hz) 50% Duty Cycle Minimum…
  • Page 174: Working Voltage

    Appendix A Specifications Working Voltage Working Voltage for 1766-L32AWA/A Description Recommendation Power Supply Input to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second Isolation 265V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

  • Page 175: Expansion I/O Specifications

    Specifications Appendix A Expansion I/O Digital I/O Modules Specifications General Specifications Specification Value Dimensions 90 mm (height) x 87 mm (depth) x 40.4 mm (width) height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3.54 in. (height) x 3.43 in. (depth) x 1.59 in. (width) height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in.

  • Page 176
    Appendix A Specifications (2) Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30…1000 MHz. Input Specifications Specification 1762-IA8 1762-IQ8 1762-IQ16 1762-IQ32T 1762-IQ8OW6 Shipping weight, approx. 209 g (0.46 lbs.) 200 g (0.44 lbs.) 230 g (0.51 lbs.) 200g (0.44 lbs.) 280g (0.62 lbs.)
  • Page 177
    Specifications Appendix A Input Specifications Specification 1762-IA8 1762-IQ8 1762-IQ16 1762-IQ32T 1762-IQ8OW6 Vendor I.D. code Product type code Product code (1) Sinking/Sourcing Inputs — Sourcing/sinking describes the current flow between the I/O module and the field device. Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking field devices.
  • Page 178
    Appendix A Specifications Output Specifications Specification 1762-OA8 1762-OB8 1762-OB16 1762-OB32T 1762-OV32T Output group to Verified by one of the Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: backplane isolation following dielectric 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s. 1200V AC for 2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s.
  • Page 179
    Specifications Appendix A Output Specifications Specification 1762-OW8 1762-OW16 1762-OX6I 1762-IQ8OW6 Continuous current per 7 A (Also see “Relay common, max. Contact Ratings” on page 157.) Continuous current per 16 A 16 A 30A (Also see Module module, max. Load Ratings 1762-OX6I on page 166.) Surge current, max.
  • Page 180
    Appendix A Specifications (1) The continuous current per module must be limited so the module power does not exceed 1440VA. (2) 6 A in ambient temperatures above 40 °C (104.°F) (3) Surge Suppression – Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the life of the relay contacts.
  • Page 181: Analog Modules

    Specifications Appendix A Analog Modules Common Specifications Specification 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4 and 1762-OF4 Dimensions 90 mm (height) x 87 mm (depth) x 40 mm (width) height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3.54 in. (height) x 3.43 in. (depth) x 1.58 in. (width) height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in.

  • Page 182: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-Um001I-En-P — June

    Appendix A Specifications General Specifications Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-OF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4 Shipping weight, 240 g (0.53 lbs.) 235 g (0.517 lbs.) 260 g (0.57 lbs.) 220 g (0.53 lbs.) approx. (with carton) Bus current draw, max. 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC…

  • Page 183
    Specifications Appendix A Input Specifications Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4 Number of inputs 2 differential (unipolar) 4 differential (bipolar) 4 input channels plus 1 CJC sensor Update time (typical) 2.5 ms 130, 250, 290, 450, 530 ms Input filter and cofiguration (selectable) dependent A/D converter type…
  • Page 184
    Appendix A Specifications Input Specifications 1762-IR4 Specification 1762-IR4 ·100 Ω Platinum 385 Input types ·200 Ω Platinum 385 ·500 Ω Platinum 385 ·1,000 Ω Platinum 385 ·100 Ω Platinum 3916 ·200 Ω Platinum 3916 ·500 Ω Platinum 3916 ·1,000 Ω Platinum 3916 ·10 Ω…
  • Page 185
    Specifications Appendix A Input Specifications 1762-IR4 Specification 1762-IR4 Maximum overload at input terminals ±35V DC continuous 25 Ω (Operating with >25 Ω will reduce accuracy.) Cable impedance, max. Channel to channel isolation ±10V DC (1) Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog/Digital converter filter rate selection, excitation current selection, data format, and input noise. (2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to channel update time.
  • Page 186
    Appendix A Specifications (1) (2) 1762-IT4 Repeatability at 25 °C (77 °F) Input Type Repeatability for 10 Hz Filter Thermocouple J ±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F] Thermocouple N (-110…1300 °C [-166…2372 °F]) ±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F] Thermocouple N (-210…-110 °C [-346…-166 °F]) ±0.25 °C [±0.45 °F] Thermocouple T (-170…400 °C [-274…752 °F]) ±0 .1 °C [±0.18 °F]…
  • Page 187
    Specifications Appendix A 1762-IT4 Accuracy Input Type With Autocalibration Enabled Without Autocalibration (2) (3) Accuracy for 10 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 Hz Maximum Temperature Drift Filters (max.) at 25 °C [77 °F] at 0…60 °C at 0…60 °C [32…140 °F] Ambient [32…140 °F] Ambient…
  • Page 188
    Appendix A Specifications Valid Input/Output Data Word Formats/Ranges for 1762-IF2OF2 Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range RAW/Proportional Data Scaled-for-PID 0…10V DC 10.5V DC 32760 16380 0.0V DC 4…20 mA 21.0 mA 32760 16380 20.0 mA 31200 15600 4.0 mA 6240 3120 0.0 mA Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 189: Micrologix 1400 Replacement Kits

    Appendix Replacement Parts This chapter contains the following information: • a table of MicroLogix 1400 replacement parts • procedure for replacing the lithium battery MicroLogix 1400 The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog number. Replacement Kits…

  • Page 190
    Appendix B Replacement Parts Battery compartment Battery 1762 I/O expansion bus connector Battery wire connector Battery connector Battery wires 44522 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 191: Battery Handling

    Replacement Parts Appendix B Battery Handling Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards. • Use only for the intended operation. • Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures. • Do not ship on passenger aircraft. ATTENTION: •…

  • Page 192
    Appendix B Replacement Parts cargo-only aircraft, providing certain conditions are met. Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted. A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par. 8-a) provides that: “Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received.”…
  • Page 193: Disposal

    Replacement Parts Appendix B Disposal ATTENTION: Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection. Explosion or violent rupture is possible. Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short-circuiting, compacting, or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal.

  • Page 194
    Appendix B Replacement Parts Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 195: Understanding The Controller Status Indicators

    • analog expansion I/O diagnostics and troubleshooting • calling Rockwell Automation for assistance Understanding the The MicroLogix 1400 provides three groups of status indicators: • the status LEDs on the top of the controller, Controller Status Indicators • the status indicators on the LCD •…

  • Page 196: Status Indicators On The Lcd

    Appendix C Troubleshooting Your System Controller LED Indicators Color Indicates FAULT No fault detected red flashing Application fault detected Controller hardware faulted FORCE No forces installed amber Forces installed amber flashing Forces installed in force files but forcing is disabled. Status Indicators on the LCD Figure 4 — Status Indicators on the LCD Status Indicators on the LCD…

  • Page 197: I/O Status Indicators On The Lcd

    Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C When using a MicroLogix 1400 controller, the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0. I/O Status Indicators on the LCD Figure 5 — I/O Status Indicators on the LCD I/O LED screen on the LCD…

  • Page 198: Controller Error Recovery Model

    Cycle power. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error LEDs on solid Error persists. Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller. For error codes and Status File information, see MicroLogix 1400 Power LED on and Application fault Hardware/Software Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication FAULT LED flashing Major Fault Detected 1766-RM001.

  • Page 199
    Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C Identify the error code and Is the error Start description. hardware related? Refer to page 206 for Are the wire Tighten wire connections. probable cause and connections tight? recommended action. Does the Is the Power Clear Fault.
  • Page 200: Analog Expansion I/O Diagnostics And Troubleshooting

    Channel over-range or under-range conditions are reported in the module’s input data table. Module hardware errors are reported in the controller’s I/O status file. Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001 for more information.

  • Page 201: Critical And Non-Critical Errors

    Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C Critical and Non-Critical Errors Non-critical module errors are recoverable. Channel errors (over-range or under-range errors) are non-critical. Non-critical error conditions are indicated in the module input data table. Non-critical configuration errors are indicated by the extended error code. See Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF2OF2 on page 188.

  • Page 202: Error Codes

    The type of error determines what kind of information exists in the extended error information field. These types of module errors are typically reported in the controller’s I/O status file. Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001 for more information.

  • Page 203: Calling Rockwell Automation For Assistance

    Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF2OF2 Error Type Hex Equivalent Module Error Extended Error Error Description Code Information Code Binary Binary Hardware-Specific X210 0 0001 0000 Reserved Error Configuration Error X400 0 0000 0000 General configuration error; no additional information X401 0 0000 0001 Invalid input data format selected (channel 0)

  • Page 204
    Appendix C Troubleshooting Your System • controller error codes (Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication 1766-RM001 for error code information.) Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 205: Preparing For Firmware Upgrade

    Appendix Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The operating system (OS) can be upgraded through the Ethernet port of the controller. In order to download a new operating system, you must have the following: • ControlFLASH Upgrade Kit containing the new OS Go to http://www.ab.com/programmablecontrol/plc/micrologix/downloads.ht to download the upgrade kit.

  • Page 206: Prepare The Controller For Firmware Upgrade

    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade 1. It is important that the SNMP server is enabled before the firmware upgrade begins. You can check if the SNMP server is enabled by looking at the Channel Configuration page for Channel 1 in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro.

  • Page 207: Using Controlflash For Firmware Upgrade

    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 2. Ensure that you complete the IP configuration for the OS firmware upgrade. Note the assigned IP address of the controller. If the IP address is not configured you can still perform the IP configuration using Static, BOOTP or DHCP settings.

  • Page 208
    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box is displayed. 2. Click the Next button. 3. Select the appropriate catalog number from the Catalog Number dialog box and click the Next button. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 209
    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D The AB_SNMP.DLL — Enter IP Address dialog box is displayed. 4. Type in the IP address for the processor. Use the IP address that was configured earlier, or use an available IP IMPORTANT address assigned to by your network administrator.
  • Page 210
    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System For the IP address to be configured using the ControlFLASH BOOTP server, the BOOTP settings should be enabled in the controller, see step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 192. 8.
  • Page 211
    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 9. Click the OK button. 10. Select the appropriate revision from the Firmware Revision dialog box and click the Next button. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 212
    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Summary dialog box is displayed. 11. Click the Finish button. The ControlFLASH dialog box is displayed. 12. Click the Yes button. If your computer has more than one Ethernet interface installed, the following dialog box displays the assigned IP addresses of each of the listed Ethernet interfaces.
  • Page 213
    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 14. You may need to wait several seconds before the Progress dialog box is displayed. (A typical sequence is shown below). While the download is in progress, the RUN LED, FAULT LED and FORCE LED display a Walking Pattern (First RUN LED ON, then FAULT LED ON and then FORCE LED ON in sequence).
  • Page 214
    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The LCD displays this screen: The Run, Fault and Force LEDs display a walking Pattern. Stage 3 The LCD displays this screen: At this stage the Power and Force LEDs are solid ON. After flashing of the controller, the LCD shows this screen: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 215
    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 15. After the flashing is complete, the following dialog box prompts you to wait for the controller to reset, verify that the POWER LED is solid GREEN and verify the FAULT LED is turned OFF. 16.
  • Page 216
    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Update Status dialog box is displayed. If the update was successful, the status text box is green and has an appropriate message. If the update was not successful, the status text box is red and has an appropriate message.
  • Page 217: Controlflash Error Messages

    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 18. Click the OK button. You are returned to the Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box. 19. You can continue to upgrade additional controllers by clicking the Next button, or exit the program by clicking the Cancel button. If you click cancel, you are asked to verify that you want to end the update session.

  • Page 218
    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System This error message is displayed if the ControlFLASH tool is unable to match the processor to the catalog number that was selected in the Catalog Number dialog box. To clear this error: 1.
  • Page 219: Missing Or Corrupt Os State

    Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D To clear this error: 1. Connect the controller’s Ethernet port directly to the computer’s Ethernet port using a crossover cable, or disable or uninstall any firewall VPN or virus protection software running on the computer. 2.

  • Page 220: Recovering From Missing Or Corrupt Os State

    Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System • The POWER LED is solid ON and the RUN, FAULT and FORCE LEDs are blinking simultaneously. The LCD shows this information: • The POWER and FAULT LED are solid ON and the LCD shows this information: When the LCD displays the Fpga Corrupt information, the LEDs do not show the Walking pattern during the firmware upgrade process.

  • Page 221: Communication Interface

    • Modbus RTU Master/Slave • ASCII • DNP3 Slave RS-232 Communication The communications port on Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller utilizes a combined, isolated RS-232/485 interface. RS-232 and RS-485 are Interface Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standards that specify the electrical and mechanical characteristics for serial binary communication.

  • Page 222: Df1 Half-Duplex Protocol

    RS-232 point-to-point communication is required. DF1 protocol controls message flow, detects and signals errors, and retries if errors are detected. Example DF1 Full-Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment, see Chapter Communication Connections. MicroLogix 1400 Personal Computer Personal Computer Modem cable 1761-CBL-PM02 MicroLogix 1400…

  • Page 223
    (including the master) on the DF1 Half-Duplex link. MicroLogix 1400 can act as the master or as a slave on a Half-Duplex network. When the MicroLogix 1400 is a slave device, a master device is required to “run”…
  • Page 224: Considerations When Communicating As A Df1 Slave

    Radio modems may be implemented in a point-to-point topology supporting either Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex communications, or in a multi-drop topology supporting Half-Duplex communications between three or more modems. MicroLogix 1400 also supports DF1 Radio Modem protocol. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…

  • Page 225: Communication Protocol

    “Half-Duplex Modem”. MicroLogix 1400 controllers also support DCD (Data Carrier Detect) line for DF1 Radio Modem protocol. For other protocols, you can only access the DCD signal from your ladder logic. No other modem handshaking lines (such as Data Set Ready and Data Terminal Ready) are supported by MicroLogix 1400 controller.

  • Page 226: Dh-485 Configuration Parameters

    Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface • maximum network segment of 1,219 m (4,000 ft.) The DH-485 protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and responders. All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers. To determine which initiator has the right to transmit, a token passing algorithm is used.

  • Page 227: Important Dh-485 Network Planning Considerations

    Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface Appendix E Devices that Support DH-45 Network Catalog Description Installation Function Publication Number 1746-BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices. Program in 1746-UM004 BASIC to interface the 3 channels (2 RS232 and 1 DH-485) to printers, 1746-PM001 modems, or the DH-485 network for data collection.

  • Page 228
    Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface (8000 ft.). For additional information on connections using the AIC+, refer to the Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4. Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference: •…
  • Page 229
    Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface Appendix E Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network. The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance: •…
  • Page 230
    Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order. Initiators, such as personal computers, should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network.
  • Page 231: Example Dh-485 Connections

    Use a 1763-NC01 Series A or later cable to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH-485 network. You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH-485 network directly without using a RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such as the AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in the illustration below, because Channel 0 has isolation and RS-485 built-in.

  • Page 232
    DC SOURCE DC SOURCE DC SOURCE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL MicroLogix Personal MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix 1000 Computer 1200 1500 DH-485 Network Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable AIC+ TERM 1763-NC01 SHLD CHS GND…
  • Page 233: Modbus Communication Protocol

    You can use ASCII by configuring the RS-232/485 port, channel 0 and the RS-232 port, Channel 2 for the ASCII driver. Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1766-RM001 for detailed configuration information.

  • Page 234
    Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 235: Micrologix 1400 Distributed

    The default communication protocol for the Ethernet Channel 1 in the MicroLogix 1400 is Ethernet/IP. To communicate with DNP3 over IP protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller, the channel must be configured to use the DNP3 protocol. The MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller supports DNP3 protocol via Channel 0 and/or Channel 2 Serial ports.

  • Page 236
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) In RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro, open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 project tree. There are 4 configurations related to DNP3 protocol in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro software: • Channel 0 configuration • Channel 2 configuration •…
  • Page 237: Channel 0 And Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Link Layer related configuration can be done in the Channel 0 and/or Channel 2 tab. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…

  • Page 238: Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration In RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro, open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B project tree. To enable DNP3 over IP protocol, check DNP3 over IP Enable in the Channel 1 configuration.

  • Page 239
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Unlike serial port configuration, cycle power to the controller after downloading the Ethernet port configuration to enable the DNP3 over IP feature. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 240: Dnp3 Slave Application Layer Configuration

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Link Layer related configuration can also be done in the Chan. 1 — DNP3 tab. DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Application Layer related configuration can be done in the DNP3 Slave tab.

  • Page 241
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers, you can see the following tabs. If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 0 port, both Channel 0 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set. If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 2 port, Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set.
  • Page 242: Channel 0 And Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Parameters

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers, you can see the following tabs. DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by Channel 0, Channel 1 and Channel 2 ports if Channels 0, 1 and 2 are configured for DNP3 protocol. Any changes in the DNP3 Slave configuration tab will affect all channels.

  • Page 243
    Enable Master Address Validation Valid selections are Enabled(Checked) and Disabled(Unchecked). Default value is Disabled (Unchecked). When the selection is Disabled(Unchecked), the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master. When the selection is Enabled(Checked), the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master which is configured in the Master Node0 to Master Node4.
  • Page 244
    No Handshaking. If you want to use the Modem line in a half duplex network, you must select Half Duplex Modem(CTS/RTS handshaking). If the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to an RS-485 network and a 1763-NC01 cable is used, you must select No Handshaking (485 Network).
  • Page 245
    When the selection is Enabled (Checked), Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are sent out with the function code FC_CONFIRMED_USER_DATA (3). In this case, the MicroLogix 1400 waits for the confirmation and may retry the Frame if it did not receive the confirmation from DNP3 Master within the time Confirmation Timeout (x1 ms).
  • Page 246: Channel 1(Ethernet) Link Layer Configuration Parameters

    Channel 1(Ethernet) Link Layer Configuration Parameters This section is only applicable to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. The DNP3 over IP subsystem in the MicroLogix 1400 supports Listening End Point, TCP Dual End Point and Datagram End Point type. Listening End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server and UDP datagram.

  • Page 247
    The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available. The MicroLogix 1400 does not request TCP client connection to DNP3 Master until an unsolicited response is generated. UDP Datagram Accepts only broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of 0xFFFD, 0xFFFE and 0xFFFF in the request.
  • Page 248
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) When the selection is Enabled(Checked), the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master Node Address which is configured in the parameters Master Node0 on page 234, and Master Node1, Master Node2, Master Node3, Master Node4 on page 235.
  • Page 249
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Master Node1, Master Node2, Master Node3, Master Node4 This value is used for validation of the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled (Checked). This value is only valid when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled (Checked).
  • Page 250
    Keep Alive Interval (x1 s) This parameter specifies a time interval for TCP Keep Alive mechanism. If the timer times out, the MicroLogix 1400 transmits a keep-alive message. The keep-alive message is a DNP Data Link Layer status request (FC_REQUEST_LINK_STATUS). If a response is not received to the keep-alive message, the MicroLogix 1400 deems the TCP connection broken and closes the TCP connection.
  • Page 251: Dnp3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters

    Valid selections are Enabled (Checked) and Disabled (Unchecked). Default value is Disabled (Unchecked). When the selection is Disabled (Unchecked), the MicroLogix 1400 will not send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart until it has received a FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED (20) command from the DNP3 Master..

  • Page 252
    Valid selections are Enabled (Checked) and Disabled (Unchecked). Default value is Disabled (Unchecked). When the selection is Disabled (Unchecked), the MicroLogix 1400 does not send Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART IIN bit on startup. When the selection is Enabled (Checked), the MicroLogix 1400 sends Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART IIN bit on startup.
  • Page 253
    0, IIN1.4 bit is never turned on. Max Response Size The MicroLogix 1400 sends Application Layer frame to fit in Max Response Size. If the Response packet size is larger than this value, the MicroLogix 1400 fragments the Response packet.
  • Page 254
    The valid range is 0…65535. Default value is 0. Number of Class1 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response, this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 1 events. In this case, value 0 will disable to generate the event.
  • Page 255
    DNP3 Object Data File Number The DNP3 Object Data File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 objects to MicroLogix 1400 data table files. The number of elements defined for each of those data table files also defines the number of corresponding DNP3 objects.
  • Page 256
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 256 for more details. DNP3 Object Config File Number The DNP3 Object Config File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 object properties (class number, online/offline status, object quality flags, deadbands and/or thresholds) to MicroLogix 1400 data table files.
  • Page 257
    When the selection is Disabled (Unchecked), the MicroLogix 1400 disables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem. When the selection is Enabled (Checked), the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem. Critical FCs File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers.
  • Page 258
    The valid range is 0…7200 (2 hrs). Default value is 1800 (30 mins). When DNP3 Master does not change the Session Key within this time configured, the MicroLogix 1400 invalidate the Session Key and its state for each user. Expected Session Key Change Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers.
  • Page 259
    Appendix F Reply Timeout (x100 ms) in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. This parameter is used for configuring the reply timeout in 100 msec. The valid range is 0…1200 (120 s). Default value is 20 (2 s).
  • Page 260
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) In RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro software, when this parameter is configured properly, you can see a DNP3 Auth User Info Config File tree in Channel Configuration. The following table shows the structure of the DNP3 Secure Authentication User Info Configuration File.
  • Page 261
    Update Key (7) 0 to 65535 Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. The diagnostic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem.
  • Page 262
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) This file number is used to define default variations in a response to a Class 0 poll request. The value of this parameter is N file only. Valid range is 0, 7, 9 to 255. Default value is 0.
  • Page 263
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Table 2.1 Word Offset Default Variation for the following Objects Group and Standard Alternate Default Default Variation Variations Binary Input Static Object g1v1 Binary Input Change Object g2v3 v1, v2 Binary Output Static Object…
  • Page 264: Dnp3 Slave Application Layer

    Connections. When this parameter is checked (disabled) in the Channel 1 Ethernet configuration, the MicroLogix 1400 does not allow any incoming Ethernet/IP connections. In doing so, you cannot use RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro over Ethernet port to monitor or change the configuration/user program.

  • Page 265: Function Codes

    02 — Write The WRITE function code is used to write the contents of DNP3 objects from the DNP3 master to the MicroLogix 1400. This function code is used for clearing bit IIN1.7 [DEVICE_RESTART], setting time in the MicroLogix 1400 and downloading user programs to the MicroLogix 1400 controller.

  • Page 266
    FC_IMMED_FREEZE (FC Byte = 0x07) 07 — Immediate Freeze Upon receiving a request with this function, the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value of a counter point to a separate memory location associated with the same point. The copied value remains constant until the next freeze operation to the same point.
  • Page 267
    Appendix F FC_WARM_RESTART (FC Byte = 0x0E) 14 — Warm Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a partial reset. This applies only to the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller. FC_INITIALIZE_APPL (FC Byte = 0x10) 16 — Initialize Application This function code is used to initialize the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro software.
  • Page 268
    24 — Record Current Time, used for LAN Procedure This function code is used in the procedure for time synchronizing MicroLogix 1400 controllers that communicate over a LAN. This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. FC_OPEN_FILE (FC Byte = 0x19) 25 — Open File This function code is used to make a file available for reading or writing.
  • Page 269
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. FC_ACTIVATE_CONFIG (FC Byte = 0x1F) 31 — Activate Config This function code is used to begin using the configuration or executable code specified by the objects included in the request.
  • Page 270: Internal Indications

    Communication Status file, CS0:58 or CS2:58. For more details, see Diagnostics. DNP3 Objects and All of the DNP3 Objects which are supported in the MicroLogix 1400 are summarized in Implementation Table on page 337. MicroLogix 1400 Data Files…

  • Page 271
    MicroLogix controller, but are similar. Mapping is required between DNP3 data files and MicroLogix 1400 data files. Overview DNP3 Data objects that are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller are listed below: • DNP3 Binary Input Object • DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object •…
  • Page 272
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 273
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers: Each of the data files for a DNP3 Object will have a file number in the user memory as shown below. You can configure the Data file number for each DNP3 Object in the DNP3 Slave tab of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration.
  • Page 274: Dnp3 Data Files

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) DNP3 Data Files Relationship between DNP3 object database and MicroLogix data files DNP Objects Micrologix Data Files Object Name Related Maximum File name for Data File Type File Maximum Groups Configurable Number…

  • Page 275: Dnp3 Configuration Files

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F DNP3 Configuration Files You can set configuration files for each object. These configuration files allow you to configure parameters such as Class level and Object Flag bit information for each element. Only a Binary Data file type can be used for configuration file.

  • Page 276
    The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag. Other bits are reserved. Two new bits are defined in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. The bit TE is used to generate an event by setting it regardless of the change of state.
  • Page 277
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F ladder logic or communications, the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan. The bit DCE is used to suppress the events by the change of state.
  • Page 278
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) • 32-bit Counter Threshold Config File Number (In Series B) Word Offet Description Element 0 Threshold for point 0 Element 1 Threshold for point 1 Element 2 Threshold for point 2 Element 3…
  • Page 279: Dnp3 Binary Input Object

    DNP3 Binary Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section. The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations. Binary Input Static Objects: •…

  • Page 280
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) • g1v1 — Binary Input — Packed format (default) • g1v2 — Binary Input — With flags Binary Input Event Objects: • g2v0 — Binary Input Event — All Variations • g2v1 — Binary Input Event — Without time •…
  • Page 281: Dnp3 Binary Output Object

    DNP3 Binary Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section. The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any Variation. Binary Output Static Objects: •…

  • Page 282
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Related Configuration File Number: • Binary Output Config File Number To generate a Binary Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller, you should configure Binary Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file.
  • Page 283
    If this bit is set, the Online bit in the status flag of each Binary Output points is set when you read Binary Output Status objects. Binary Command — Control relay output block (CROB) The MicroLogix 1400 has three control models for Binary Output Control. They are Activation model, Complementary latch model and Complementary two-output model.
  • Page 284: Dnp3 Double Bit Binary Input Object

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) These control codes and point models are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller: • 0x00 (NUL/NUL): Clear field Off • 0x20 (NUL/NUL): Clear field On • 0x01 (Pulse On/NUL): Clear field Off, Activation Model •…

  • Page 285
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F • Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number: • Double Bit Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Double Bit Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller, you should configure Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file.
  • Page 286: Dnp3 Counter Object

    Index 16 to 23 is 3(B39:2/0 and B39:2/1), and Class Level of other Indexes are 0. DNP3 Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section. The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation. Counter Static Objects: •…

  • Page 287
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F • 32-bit Counter Config File Number To generate a Counter Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller, you should configure Counter Object File Numbers in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file.
  • Page 288
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Counter Object File. B32:1/0 and B32:1/1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Counter Object File. Default Class Level is 0. Any other bits are reserved. So, in the example below, for…
  • Page 289: Dnp3 Frozen Counter Object

    DNP3 Frozen Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section. The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations. Frozen Counter Static Objects: •…

  • Page 290
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) If both 16-bit Counter Object File Number and 32-bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file, the 16-bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number is 0 and the 32-bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number of starts after the last index number for 16-bit Frozen Counter Object.
  • Page 291: Dnp3 Analog Input Object

    DNP3 Analog Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section. The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any variation. Analog Input Static Objects: •…

  • Page 292
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Related Object File Number: • 16-bit Analog Input Object File Number • 32-bit Analog Input Object File Number • Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number: • 16-bit Analog Input Config File Number •…
  • Page 293
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F indexes are configured. Index 0 of the Analog Input Object is N14:0, Index 10 is L15:0, Index 20 is F16:0 and Index 29 is F16:9. As an example, an Analog Input Config File is shown below. These files have 10 elements each.
  • Page 294
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Class Level of Index 2 is 3(B36:2/0 and B36:2/1), and Class Level of other Indexes are 0. For a 32-bit Analog Input Config File, Class Level of Index 10 is 1(B37:0/0 and B37:0/1), Class Level of Index 11 is 2(B37:1/0 and B37:1/1), Class Level of Index 12 is 3(B37:2/0 and B37:2/1), and Class Level of other Indexes are 0.
  • Page 295: Dnp3 Analog Output Object

    DNP3 Analog Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section. The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation. Analog Output Status Objects: •…

  • Page 296
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) To generate Analog Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller, you should configure the Analog Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file. When only one of the Analog Output Object File is configured, Index number starts from 0 for the configured object.
  • Page 297: Dnp3 Bcd Object

    Appendix F Analog Output Command — Control analog output block (AOB) When the controller is in Non-Executing mode, the MicroLogix 1400 will not accept an Analog Output Command. The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Code 7 in the response. To access the objects 41(AOB), the controller mode should be in Executing mode.

  • Page 298
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) To generate a Small BCD Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller, you should configure the Small BCD Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file. When a Small BCD Object File is configured, the Index number starts from 0. 1 word is used for 1 Index of Small BCD Object.
  • Page 299: Dnp3 Data Set Object

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F DNP3 Data Set Object This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. These object groups and variations are supported. Data Set Objects: • g85v0 — Data Set Prototype — Any Variation •…

  • Page 300
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Prototypes Files» to 9, N Data files 50 to 58 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Prototypes configuration. Data Set Prototypes file N50 Data Set Prototypes file N51…
  • Page 301
    Channel Configuration of RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro software, where «X» is the element numbers of each Prototype or Descriptor. For DNP3 DS Prototype X, you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to construct the Data Set Prototype objects. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 302
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) For DNP3 DS Descriptor X, you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to construct the Data Set Descriptor objects. Data Set Prototypes Configuration Parameters These parameters are used to construct Data Set Prototypes object.
  • Page 303
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Prototype Element Configuration: Each Prototypes element is configured in this configuration. Double-click an element to edit it. Descriptor Code: UUID for element 1. NSPC/NAME/DAEL for element 2 or higher. Data Type Code: NONE for element 1.
  • Page 304
    Once this parameter is set by the ladder logic or communications, the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan. This parameter is…
  • Page 305
    0/1/2/3 in the DNP3 Data Set Descriptors Object File. When one of the values that are pointing to the Event Occurrence Condition 0/1/2/3 are changed or the criteria are met, the MicroLogix 1400 generates a Data Set Event, retrievable using the object g88v1.
  • Page 306
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Descriptor Element Configuration: Each Descriptors element is configured in this here. Double-click each element to edit it. Descriptor Code: NONE, NAME, DAEL, PTYP Data Type Code: NONE, VSTR, UINT, INT, FLT, OSTR, BSTR, TIME Max Data Length (bytes): 0…255…
  • Page 307
    • File Sub Element. When these values are configured properly according to the supported data files, the MicroLogix 1400 responds with a g87v1 object filled with the value in the data file. The following table shows the supported data files for the Point Addressing.
  • Page 308
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) When the Descriptor Code is selected as PTYP, the Point Addressing parameters for the Descriptor element are replaced by 10 Point Addressing parameters. These should be configured in the same order of the DAEL elements in the relevant Prototypes.
  • Page 309: Object Quality Flags

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F this, Point Address 4 in the PTYP element configuration of the Descriptor should be configured properly. Object Quality Flags The object flag is composed of an 8 bit string for some DNP3 objects. The tables below show Flag Descriptions for each object.

  • Page 310
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) There are some rules for the Object flag set or clear for each bit by the controller. The rules below are also applied to Event data. • When the controller is in Non-Executing mode, the object flag is always all •…
  • Page 311
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Object Flags for Binary Output Bit Offset Name Description ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non-Executing mode. 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist.
  • Page 312: Dnp3 Device Attribute Object

    DNP3 Device Attribute The Device Attribute object can be used to identify DNP3 Slave devices. With the MicroLogix 1400, some of the variations are written so that you can Object read or write your own strings in your application.

  • Page 313
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F The object group of the Device Attribute object is 0. The supported range of the variation is 211…255. The R/W property shows if the object is Read Only, Read, or Write. If the R/W property is writable, the value which was written by DNP3 master device is stored to non-volatile memory.
  • Page 314
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Object Group 0, Variations for Attribute Set 0 Variation Read Attribute Length in Max Length Description Value (Series A) Value (Series B) /Write Data Type Bytes in Bytes (Series A) (Series B)
  • Page 315: Event Reporting

    This section covers how to generate DNP3 events from DNP3 Data Objects and how to report the generated events by polled response or unsolicited response. Generating Events The MicroLogix 1400 has a separate buffer area that you can use to log DNP3 events internally. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…

  • Page 316
    Event data type. With Series B controllers, a Data Set event can consume multiple numbers of the event buffers. If the number of the generated events reaches this value, the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN2.3 [EVENT_BUFFER_OVERFLOW]. Further events are not logged until the logged events are reported to DNP3 Master and the buffer is available.
  • Page 317
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F 4 files will be automatically generated in the tree list of the Data Files. You need to adjust the number of the elements for each file according to your application. In this example, the number of the elements is 10 for Binary Input Object File and 10 for 16-bit Analog Input Object File.
  • Page 318
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) there are any changes for the points(B10:0, B10:1 or B10:2). For any other Binary Input points, the events will not be generated. In the same manner, this 16-bit Analog Input Object File has bit 1/bit 0 of B36:0, B36:1 and B36:2 configured to 0/1, 1/0 and 1/1 respectively.
  • Page 319
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F event, if there are any changes for the points(N14:0, N14:1 or N14:2). For any other 16-bit Analog Input points, the events will not be generated. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 320: Control Generating Event

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Control Generating Event The MicroLogix 1400 checks all elements in the Object Data file for changes at the end of a scan and generates events where needed. The key method to turn on and off event generating by ladder logic is to assign or un-assign the Class information bits in the Object Config Files.

  • Page 321: Reporting Event By Polled Response

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F In the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers, new configuration files are defined for the Deadband for Analog Input Objects and the Threshold for Counter Objects. The feature of the configuration files replaces the ladder program in this section.

  • Page 322: Reporting Event By Unsolicited Response

    • DNP3 Object Config File Number • content of the Config File In some cases, MicroLogix 1400 may not send an Unsolicited Response even though the parameters are configured properly. • Normally, when the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is checked,…

  • Page 323
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F The example below shows how to initiate and send the Unsolicited Response. Master Node0 in Channel 0 Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported to the Master with the node address 3.
  • Page 324: Collision Avoidance

    When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to RS485 network, it monitors all data on the link. If the MicroLogix 1400 is preparing to transmit a packet and finds the link busy, it waits for an interval defined by the Backoff_Time until it is no longer busy.

  • Page 325: Time Synchronization

    Time Synchronization The time value in the embedded RTC module of the MicroLogix 1400 controller is updated by an RTC Function file every 2 seconds. This resolution is insufficient to log DNP3 events in a DNP3 subsystem. Another timer, incremented by 1 millisecond in the DNP3 Slave subsystem, serves to provide appropriate resolution.

  • Page 326: Download A User Program Via Dnp3 Network

    DNP3 Network Channel 0 Status File, Ethernet Channel 1 Status File, and Serial Channel 2 Status File can be uploaded from the MicroLogix 1400. All File-Control/Status of Requested Operation objects and supported File-Control/Status of Requested Operation objects are listed in this section.

  • Page 327: Default Directories And Files

    • Directory level can only contain directories. • File level can only contain files. Note that the directory marker is different in the MicroLogix 1400 Series A and Series B controllers. The directory marker is «/» for Series A and «» for Series B controllers.

  • Page 328
    After saving the file, you can see the file «ML1400A_DNP3S.IMG». This is the file to be used for download. RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro v8.10.00 and the MicroLogix 1400 Series IMPORTANT A controller do not support the opening of *.IMG files. Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files (*.RSS) format before…
  • Page 329: Rules For File Authentication

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro v8.30.00 and the MicroLogix 1400 Series IMPORTANT B controller support the opening of *.IMG files. However, some information is not stored into the IMG file, for example, rung comments. Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files (*.RSS) format before generating RSLogix IMG Files (*.IMG).

  • Page 330: Rules For Downloading A User Program

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Once the DNP3 Master receives a proper Authentication Key (Non-zero value) from the MicroLogix 1400, the Authentication Key must be used for sending the request with the function code OPEN_FILE(25) or DELETE_FILE(27). Rules for Downloading a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN_FILE(25), WRITE(2), and CLOSE_FILE(26) for downloading user programs.

  • Page 331: Rules For Uploading A User Program

    Activate Configuration (0x1F) after downloading the user program. Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes. The MicroLogix 1400 supports downloading up to 256Kbyte size of user program when Recipe is not configured. When Recipe is configured, Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes.

  • Page 332: Rules For Initializing A User Program

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) The maximum file size is 384 Kbytes. The MicroLogix 1400 supports uploading of user programs up to 256Kbyte in size when Recipe is not configured. When Recipe is configured, Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes.

  • Page 333: Initialize User Program

    If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL (16) with the object Application Identifier (g90v1), it changes mode to Remote Program. If the controller is in a fault mode, the MicroLogix 1400 clears the fault before changing the mode to Remote Program.

  • Page 334: Diagnostics

    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) the controller is in a fault mode, it sends the command with the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL (16) before sending the command with the function code FC_STOP_APPL (18). Diagnostics Errors in a DNP3 Slave subsystem are logged in the Communication Status File.

  • Page 335
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Communication Status File Words Words Offset File/Element File/Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 CS0:17 CS2:17 Link Layer Error Codes 0: ERR_NO_ERROR 1: ERR_NO_RX_BUFFER 2: ERR_TOO_SHORT 3: ERR_TOO_LONG 4: ERR_UART_ERROR…
  • Page 336
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Communication Status File Words Words Offset File/Element File/Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 CS0:49 CS2:49 RTS Send Delay CS0:50 CS2:50 RTS Off Delay CS0:51 CS2:51 bits 0-7: Baud Rate…
  • Page 337
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Communication Status File Words Words Offset File/Element File/Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 CS0:68 CS2:68 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0: NO_ERROR — No error found in the Transport Layer.
  • Page 338
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) The elements can be seen in the Function Files for each Channel. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 339
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Link Layer diagnostic counter CS0:9 to CS0:17 and CS2:9 to CS2:17, the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro as below.
  • Page 340: Diagnostics For Ethernet Channel (Channel 1)

    RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro software as below. Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel (Channel 1) This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. Diagnostic Counters and Errors in DNP3 Slave subsystem for the Ethernet channel are logged in the Data File. The data file is configured in the parameter…

  • Page 341
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Diagnostic File Number. This table shows the 80 words of the data file for the troubleshooting. Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category Counter for Commands Received TCP Server — Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP Server.
  • Page 342
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category Counter for Commands Received UDP Datagram — Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 UDP. Counter for Commands Received with Error Counter for Replies Sent Reserved…
  • Page 343
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category Counter for Commands Sent TCP Client — Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP Client. Reserved Counter for Replies Received Counter for Replies Received with Error…
  • Page 344
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category Application Layer Error Codes: DNP3 Slave — Application Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 Slave. 0: NO_ERROR — No error found in the Application Layer. 1: FC_CANNOT_BROADCAST — Reserved 2: FC_NOT_SUPPORTED — The received packet has unsupported Function Code.
  • Page 345
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category Transport Function Layer Error Codes: 0: NO_ERROR — No error found in the Transport Layer. 1: DISCARD_NOT_FIRST_SEG — The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment.
  • Page 346
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Error Codes Value (DEC) Mnemonic Description ERR_PACKET_RELEASE Firmware use only 19-29 Reserved ERR_CONN_REJECTED Incoming Connection is rejected by the IP address validation. ERR_INVALID_HEADER_CRC Received packet header has invalid CRC. ERR_INVALID_HEADER Received packet header has invalid packet format.
  • Page 347: Diagnostics For Secure Authentication

    Diagnostics for Secure Authentication This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers. Counters in DNP3 Slave Secure Authentication subsystem are logged in the Data File. The data file is configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication.

  • Page 348
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Word Offset Current State Description Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Reply Security Idle Event Counter for Reply Timeout…
  • Page 349: Function Codes

    11 (0x0B) FC_FREEZE_AT_TIME Request 12 (0x0C) FC_FREEZE_AT_TIME_NR Request 13 (0x0D) FC_COLD_RESTART MicroLogix 1400 parses. MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state. Request 14 (0x0E) FC_WARM_RESTART Request 15 (0x0F)

  • Page 350
    11 (0x0B) FC_FREEZE_AT_TIME Request 12 (0x0C) FC_FREEZE_AT_TIME_NR Request 13 (0x0D) FC_COLD_RESTART MicroLogix 1400 parses. MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 351: Implementation Table

    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series B Controllers Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Request 14 (0x0E) FC_WARM_RESTART MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 15 (0x0F) FC_INITIALIZE_DATA Obsolete Request 16 (0x10) FC_INITIALIZE_APPL MicroLogix 1400 parses.

  • Page 352
    DNP3 Master, or must be parsed/sent by the MicroLogix 1400. The implementation table lists all functionality required by either DNP3 Master or MicroLogix 1400 as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Procedures. Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by grayed table cells.
  • Page 353
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 354
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 355
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 356
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 357
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 358
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 359
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 360
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 361
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 362
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group & Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description…
  • Page 363
    MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Appendix F Notes: Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 364
    Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 365: Micrologix 1400 Controllers And Ethernet Communication

    • describes MicroLogix 1400 controllers and Ethernet communication. • describes MicroLogix 1400 performance considerations. • describes Ethernet network connections and media. • explains how the MicroLogix 1400 establishes node connections. • lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures. • describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways.

  • Page 366: Micrologix 1400 Performance Considerations

    Channel 1 RS-232/485 Ethernet (DH485, DF1, or ASCII) (10/100Base-T) MicroLogix 1400 Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1400 controller varies according to: • size of Ethernet messages. Performance • frequency of Ethernet messages. Considerations • network loading. • the implementation of and performance of your processor application program.

  • Page 367: Micrologix 1400 And Pc Connections To The Ethernet Network

    The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO/IEC 8802-3 STD 802.3 and utilizes 10/100Base-T media. Connections are made directly from the Connections to the MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet hub or switch. The network setup is simple and Ethernet Network cost effective. Typical network topology is pictured below.

  • Page 368: Cables

    • Use the auto negotiation function for both the switch port and the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port • If you want to force to a specific speed/duplex mode, you must force both the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and the switch port to the same setting. Cables Shielded and non-shielded twisted-pair 10/100Base-T cables with RJ45 connectors are supported.

  • Page 369
    Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix G green/green, white brown/brown, they are also numbered one to four in the order shown. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 370: Ethernet Connections

    MicroLogix 1400 to enable the MicroLogix 1400 to receive solicited messages from a client program or another processor. In order to send an outgoing message, the MicroLogix 1400 must first establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network.

  • Page 371: Duplicate Ip Address Detection

    IP address assigned to this device does not match the address of any other network device. The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network. If the MicroLogix 1400 determines that there is a conflict (another device on the network with a matching IP address), the following message gets posted on the LCD display.

  • Page 372: Configuring The Ethernet Channel On The Micrologix 1400

    Appendix G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network. Configuring the Ethernet There are three ways to configure the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet channel 1. • via a BOOTP or DHCP request at controller powerup Channel on the •…

  • Page 373
    The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 to 65,500. MSG Reply The amount of time (in ms) that the MicroLogix 1400 will wait for a reply to a command that it has 3,000 ms read/write Timeout initiated via a MSG instruction.
  • Page 374: Configuration Using Rslogix 500/Rslogix Micro Programming

    The Location string which is specified by the SNMP client. The maximum length is 63 characters. read only Network Link ID The Link ID assigned to the MicroLogix 1400 by either an RSLinx OPC topic or by the routing table in read/write a 1756-DHRIO or 1756-DH485 module. The range is 0…199.

  • Page 375: Using The Rockwell Automation Bootp/Dhcp Utility

    The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable parameter in the channel configuration file. When both BOOTP Enable and DHCP are cleared (disabled), the MicroLogix 1400 uses the existing channel configuration data. If BOOTP is disabled, or no BOOTP server exists on the network, you…

  • Page 376
    Appendix G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from http://www.ab.com/networks/ethernet/bootp.html . The device must have BOOTP enabled (factory default) or DHCP enabled to use the utility. To configure your device using the BOOTP utility, perform the following steps. 1.
  • Page 377: Using A Dhcp Server To Configure Your Processor

    Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix G 3. Double-click on the hardware address of the device you want to configure. You will see the New Entry pop-up window with the device’s Ethernet Address (MAC). 4. Enter the IP Address and Description you want to assign to the device, and click OK.

  • Page 378: Using Subnet Masks And Gateways

    Appendix G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Using Subnet Masks and Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 configuration screen. Gateways If BOOTP is enabled, you can’t change any of the advanced Ethernet IMPORTANT communications characteristics. If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers, you must indicate the following information when configuring channel 1: •…

  • Page 379: Manually Configuring Channel 1 For Controllers On

    Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1400 controller located on a subnet, deselect both of the “BOOTP Enable” and “DHCP Enable” options by clicking on the checked box, as shown in the figure below.

  • Page 380
    Appendix G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface For more information on MicroLogix 1400 embedded web server capability, refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server User Manual, publication 1766-UM002. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 381: System Loading Calculations

    System Loading The MicroLogix 1400 controller is designed to support up to any seven 1762 expansion I/O modules. Calculations When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I/O, an electrical load is placed on the controller power supply.

  • Page 382: System Loading Example Calculations

    Appendix H System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading Example Calculations Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O Catalog Number n x A n x B Number of Device Current Requirements (max) Calculated Current Modules at 5V DC (mA) at 24V DC (mA) at 5V DC (mA) at 24V DC (mA)

  • Page 383: System Loading Worksheet

    System Loading and Heat Dissipation Appendix H Validating the System The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations. The systems are valid because: • Calculated Current Values < Maximum Allowable Current Values • Calculated System Loading < Maximum Allowable System Loading Validating Systems using 1766-L32AWA, or 1766-L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values…

  • Page 384
    Appendix H System Loading and Heat Dissipation Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O 1762-IQ8 1762-IQ16 1762-IQ32T 1762-IR4 1762-IT4 1762-OA8 1762-OB8 1762-OB16 1762-OB32T 1762-OF4 1762-OV32T 1762-OW8 1762-OW16 1762-OX6I 1762-IQ8OW6 Total Modules (7 maximum): Subtotal: (1) Refer to your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table. (2) Only applicable to Series B I/O modules.
  • Page 385: Calculating Heat Dissipation

    System Loading and Heat Dissipation Appendix H Validating Systems using 1766-L32AWA or 1766-L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current: Current (Subtotal from Table .): 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC mA @ 5V DC mA @ 24V DC System Loading: System Loading: = (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V)

  • Page 386
    Appendix H System Loading and Heat Dissipation Heat Dissipation 1762-OB8 1.6 W x number of modules 1.6 W x _________ 1762-OB16 2.9 W x number of modules 2.9 W x _________ 1762-OB32T 3.4 W x number of modules 3.4 W x _________ 1762-OF4 3.8 W x number of modules 3.8 W x _________…
  • Page 387
    Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, publication AG-7.1, for a complete guide to Allen-Bradley technical terms. address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For example, I:1/0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word1, bit 0.
  • Page 388
    Glossary controller A device, such as a programmable controller, used to monitor input devices and control output devices. controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set-up purposes. control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions.
  • Page 389
    I/O Expansion I/O is I/O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable. MicroLogix 1400 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I/O. false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.
  • Page 390
    Glossary high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word. input device A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals to the input circuits of the controller. inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized.
  • Page 391
    Glossary LIFO (Last-In-First-Out) The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file. low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word. logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false. General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions.
  • Page 392
    Glossary normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de-energized or the switch is deactivated; they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated. In ladder programming, a symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is logic “0”…
  • Page 393
    Glossary online Describes devices under direct communication. For example, when RSLogix 500/RSLogix Micro is monitoring the program file in a controller. operating voltage For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage. output device A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that is controlled by the controller.
  • Page 394
    Glossary read To acquire data from a storage place. For example, the processor READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder program. relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits. relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays. restore To download (transfer) a program from a personal computer to a controller.
  • Page 395
    Glossary scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program. The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction’s status during the scan. sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and controller I/O circuit —…
  • Page 396
    Glossary workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage. write To copy data to a storage device. For example, the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output modules. Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 397
    Index application 373 Numerics 1747-BA battery 17 1762 expansion I/O dimensions 23 1762-24AWA wiring diagram 36 battery 148 1762-IA8 wiring diagram 42 processor battery life expectancy 175 1762-IF2OF2 processor replacement battery 175 input type selection 50 baud rate 373 output type selection 52 before calling for assistance 189 terminal block layout 53 bit 373…
  • Page 398
    Index component descriptions 2 1762 expansion I/O 3 data table 374 communication cables 4 default communication configuration 60 memory module 2 DeviceNet Communications 83 real-time clock 2 DeviceNet network configuration errors 188 connecting 83 configure processor with DHCP server 363 DF1 Full-Duplex protocol configuring connecting 63…
  • Page 399
    Index full-duplex 64 errors configuration 188 critical 187 extended error information field 188 general considerations 8 hardware 188 generating DNP3 events 301 module error field 188 non-critical 187 grounding the controller 31 Ethernet advanced functions 364 messaging 352 half-duplex 69 processor performance 352 hard disk 375 using the SLC 5/05 processors 351…
  • Page 400
    Index minimizing electrical noise 38 configuring advanced settings 117 minimizing electrical noise on analog channels 41 I/O status indicators 93 mnemonic 377 loading communication EEPROM 136 Modbus communication protocol 219 main menu 89 mode switch 112 menu structure tree 86 modem 377 saving communication EEPROM 136 modem cable…
  • Page 401
    Index reporting event by polled response 307 reporting event by unsolicited response 308 performance reserved bit 380 Ethernet processor 352 restore 380 planning considerations for a network 213 retentive data 380 power considerations RS-232 380 input states on power down 12 RS-232 communication interface 207 isolation transformers 11 RS-485 communication interface 207…
  • Page 402
    Index system loading example calculations 368 wiring analog channels 39 limitations 367 wiring diagram worksheet 369 1762-IA8 42 system loading and heat dissipation 367 1762-IF2OF2 differential sensor 53 1762-IF2OF2 single-ended sensor 54 1762-IQ16 43 1762-IQ32T 44 target user defined file number 95 1762-IQ8 43 terminal 381 1762-IQ8OW6 50…
  • Page 403
    Rockwell Automation Publication 1766-UM001I-EN-P — June 2015…
  • Page 404
    Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.

Документ

Катaложный номер

Тип документа

 

Визуализация. Брошюра

2706, 2711P, 2711,2711E, 6182H, 6181P, 6181H, 6155R, 6180W, 6186

Брошюра

IAVISU-BR001B-RU-P

Руководство по выбору платформы визуализации. Руководство по выбору

2706, 2711P, 2711,2711E, 6182H, 6181P, 6181H, 6155R, 6180W, 6186

Руководство по выбору

VIEW-SG001A-RU-P

Получение результатов с помощью PanelBuilder32. Программное обеспечение разработки приложений для стандартных терминалов PanelView

 

Программное обеспечение разработки приложений для стандартных терминалов PanelView

2711-6.19-RU

Быстрый запуск PanelBuilder32. Программное обеспечение разработки приложений для стандартных терминалов PanelView

 

Программное обеспечение разработки приложений для стандартных терминалов PanelView

2711-6.20-RU

Начало работы с PanelBuilder Software. Руководство пользователя

 

Руководство пользователя

2711-6.2-RU

Эффективность, гибкость, долговечность

PanelView 550, 600, 900, 1000, 1400

 

2711-1.11-RU

Терминалы оператора. Информация об изделии

PanelView 1400 CRT

Информация об изделии

2711-1.12-RU

Плоскопанельные терминалы оператора. Информация об изделии

PanelView 550, PanelView 600

Информация об изделии

2711-1.13-RU

Плоскопанельные терминалы оператора. Информация об изделии

PanelView 1000

Информация об изделии

2711-1.14-RU

Плоскопанельные терминалы оператора. Информация об изделии

PanelView 900

Информация об изделии

2711-1.6-RU

Стандартные терминалы оператора PanelView. Руководство пользователя

PV300, PV550, PV600, PV900, PV1000, PV1400

Руководство пользователя

2711-6.1-RU

Панели оператора и модули дисплеев PanelView Plus с 700 по 1500 и PanelView Plus Compact 1000. Инструкция по установке

2711 P-Kxxxx, 2711 P-Txxxx, 2711 P-Bxxxx, 2711 PWxxxx, 2711PC-T10C4D1

Инструкция по установке

2711P-IN0001I-RU-P

Панели оператора PanelView Plus и PanelView Plus Compact 400 и 600. Инструкция по установке

2711 P-Kxxxx, 2711 P-Txxxx, 2711 P-Bxxxx, 2711 PWxxxx, 2711PC-T10C4D1

Инструкция по установке

2711P-IN0002G-RU-P

Панели оператора PanelView Plus Compact. Описание продукта

2711PС

Описание продукта

2711PC-PP001A-RU-P

Терминалы PanelView Plus 6. Руководство пользователя

2711P

Руководство пользователя

2711P-UM006B-RU-P

PanelView 5500 Graphic Terminals

PanelView Plus 7 Graphic Terminals

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Operator Interfaces Product Profile

2711P-PP013

Visualization Solutions Selection Guide

VIEW-SG001

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Standard Terminals Environmental Specifications Technical Data

2711P-TD008

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Performance Terminals Technical Data

2711P-TD009

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Standard Terminals Mounting Levers Installation Instructions

2711P-IN032

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Standard Terminals User Manual

2711P-UM007

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Performance Terminals User Manual

2711P-UM008

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Standard Terminals Cutout Templates

2711P-DS010

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Standard Procurement Specifications for 4…15 inch Displays

2711P-SR003

Bulletin 2711P PanelView Plus 7 Performance Procurement Specifications for 7…19 inch Displays

2711P-SR002

PanelView Plus 6 Graphic Terminals

PanelView Plus 6 Compact Graphic Terminals

PanelView 800 Graphic Terminals

Bulletin 2711R PanelView 800 Graphic Terminals Brochure

2711R-BR001

Bulletin 2711R PanelView 800 Product Profile

2711R-PP001

Visualization Solutions Selection Guide

VIEW-SG001

Bulletin 2711R PanelView 800 Graphic Terminals Technical Data

2711R-TD001

Bulletin 2711R PanelView 800 HMI Graphic Terminals Installation Instructions

2711R-IN001

Bulletin 2711R PanelView 800 Graphic Terminals Adapter Plate Kit Installation Instructions

2711R-IN002

Bulletin 2711R PanelView 800 Graphic Terminals User Manual

2711R-UM001

PanelView Component Graphic Terminals

(Ocr-Read Summary of Contents of some pages of the Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Document (Main Content), UPD: 11 March 2023)

  • 642, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 640 Knowledgebase Quick Starts MicroLogix 1400 (Node 1) Ladder Logic MSG Setup Screen Micrologix 1000 (Node 4) Ladder Logic No ladder logic is required in the destination processor, however the communications channel must be configured to match the source processor. Since the default settings for the ML1400 communications channel is DF1 protocol, 19,200 Kbaud the ML1000 must be configured to match. (Se…

  • 83, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Function Files 81 4 0 ICP – Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set (1) when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller. Once the request has been satisfied, the bit is cleared (0). 1 MRP – Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set (1) when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this…

  • 112, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 110 Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Mask (HPM) The HPM (High Preset Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a high preset interrupt from occurring. If this bit is clear (0), and a High Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC, the HSC user interrupt is not executed. This bit is controlled by the user …

  • 628, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 626 Protocol Configuration Subnet Mask 0…255 in each field. Used by the processor to interpret IP addresses when the Internet is divided into subnets. The subnet mask must be specified. You can do this either manually or by enabling BOOTP or DHCP. The processor compares and screens addresses using the mask to identify its own address to see if it should listen to corresponding messages…

  • 461, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Communications Instructions 459 4. Note that the “Sub Quality” will be “Bad” until an unsolicited message is received: 4. Configure the ML1400 MSG instruction ML1400 Channel 1 Network Link ID must be matched with the DDE/OPC Topic Remote ID configured in step #2 (0, in this example). Also configure a Remote Ethernet MSG in the ML1400 to Remote Station Address 63 a…

  • 163, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Using High-Speed Outputs 161 PWMX Output (OUT) The PWMX OUT (Output) variable defines the physical output that the PWM instruction controls. This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program. The outputs are defined as O0:0/2, O0:0/3 or O0:0/4 as listed below: • O0:0.0/2: PWM modulates output 2 of the embedded outputs. • O0:0.0/3: PWM m…

  • 372, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 370 ASCII Instructions Programming AWA Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions, always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or, send data on a time interval. If sent on a time interval, use an interval of 0.5 second or greater. Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port. This instruction will execute on either a false or…

  • 242, Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 240 Application Specific Instructions Instruction Operation When the rung is true, this instruction shall read Program Checksum from processor memory or from memory module and places the result into Destination. Address Levels for the operands involved in the RPC should be Word. The result is stored to the data type of Destination. The RPC instruction destination address supports Direct Addressing. It does not support Indirect addre…

  • 533, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Recipe and Data Logging 531 Controller Responds with Reply If the data integrity check fails, the record is deleted and an error is sent with STS of 0xF0 and ext STS of 0x0E. For more information on writing a DF1 protocol, refer to Allen-Bradley publication 1770-6.5.16 , DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual (available from http://www.literature.rockwellautomation.com ). Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File T…

  • 280, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 278 File Instructions • Control — This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words: • Length — The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source. The length of the stack can range from 1…128 (word) …

  • 129, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 127 to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the overflow value (counts are not lost in this transition). The user can specify any value for the underflow position, provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647. To load d…

  • 121, Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Using the High-Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 119 HSC Mode 0 — Up Counter Blank cells = don’t care, ⇑ = rising edge, ⇓ = falling edge HSC Mode 1 — Up Counter with External Reset and Hold Blank cells = don’t care, ⇑ = rising edge, ⇓ = falling edge HSC Mode 0 Examples Input Terminals I1:0.0/0 (HSC0) I1:0.0/1 (HSC0) I1:0.0/2 (HSC0) I1:0.0/3 (HSC0) CE Bit Comments Function Count N…

  • 549, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 MicroLogix 1400 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 547 Base 10 Logarithm LOG 112.7110 0.7686 1.14 19.8070 0.7694 None Master Control Reset MCR (End) 0.4510 0.5510 0.14 None None None Master Control Reset MCR (Start) 1.0510 1.1510 0.14 None None None Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 6.2730 0.1934 1.71 7.1602 0.1780 None Move MOV 1.4231 0.3542 1.14 1.4103 0.3722 None Message, Stead…

  • 277, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 File Instructions 275 This instruction uses the following operands: • File — The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated. • Control — The control operand is the address of the BSR’s control element. The control element consists of 3 words: • Bit Address — The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last (highest) bit posi…

  • 658, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 656 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Each time the DLG instruction receives a false-to-true transition another entry is saved in the Data Logging queue. The above data reflects that the DLG instruction was executed 5 times. The above data also reflects that no data points had changed during each DLG execution. Frequently Asked Questions Q1: Can I write my own software application to r…

  • 142, Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 140 Using High-Speed Outputs • Accelerate/decelerate intervals • Run interval The PTO instruction, along with the HSC and PWM functions, are different than most other controller instructions. Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor. This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions. In this implementation, the user defines th…

  • 473, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Communications Instructions 471 • Routing Information File : Routing Information File must be Routing Information File. • Break Connection (BK) : This bit has no impact on the operation. • IP Address of MultiHop : IP Address of MultiHop must be local IP Address (127.0.0.1 or its own IP Address). Email Functionality This section describes how to configure a SMTP …

  • 187, Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 Timer and Counter Instructions 185 CTU — Count Up CTD — Count Down Instruction Type: output The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false-to-true rung transition. When the CTU rung makes a false-to-true transition, the accumulated value is incremented by one count. The CTD instruction operates the same, except …

  • 620, Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Publication 1766-RM001A-EN-P — October 2008 618 Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map — Detail Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code (decimal) 0001…4096 Read/Write Modbus Coil Data space 1, 5, 15 10001…14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space 2 30001…30256 Read Modbus Input Register space 4 30501 Modbus Data Table Coil File Number 4 30502 Modbus Data Table Contact File Number 4 30503 Modbus Data Table Inpu…

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:

А вот и еще интересные новости по теме:

  • Тракторы беларусь руководство по ремонту
  • Парогенератор tefal express power sv8061e0 инструкция
  • Гемостатическая губка инструкция по применению при кровотечении зуба
  • Датчик косо на снегоход инструкция по эксплуатации
  • Руководство не ценит мою работу

  • 0 0 голоса
    Рейтинг статьи
    Подписаться
    Уведомить о
    guest

    0 комментариев
    Старые
    Новые Популярные
    Межтекстовые Отзывы
    Посмотреть все комментарии